RepoMirrors
/
haproxy
mirror of http://git.haproxy.org/git/haproxy.git/
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity
haproxy/doc/configuration.txt

11825 lines
580 KiB
Plaintext
Raw Blame History

----------------------
HAProxy
Configuration Manual
----------------------
version 1.5
willy tarreau
2012/12/28
This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
through the document.
Note to documentation contributors :
This document is formatted with 80 columns per line, with even number of
spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
('\') and continue on next line, indented by two characters. It is also
sometimes useful to prefix all output lines (logs, console outs) with 3
closing angle brackets ('>>>') in order to help get the difference between
inputs and outputs when it can become ambiguous. If you add sections,
please update the summary below for easier searching.
Summary
-------
1. Quick reminder about HTTP
1.1. The HTTP transaction model
1.2. HTTP request
1.2.1. The Request line
1.2.2. The request headers
1.3. HTTP response
1.3.1. The Response line
1.3.2. The response headers
2. Configuring HAProxy
2.1. Configuration file format
2.2. Time format
2.3. Examples
3. Global parameters
3.1. Process management and security
3.2. Performance tuning
3.3. Debugging
3.4. Userlists
3.5. Peers
4. Proxies
4.1. Proxy keywords matrix
4.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
5. Bind and Server options
5.1. Bind options
5.2. Server and default-server options
6. HTTP header manipulation
7. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
7.1. Matching integers
7.2. Matching strings
7.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
7.4. Matching IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
7.5. Available matching criteria
7.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
7.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
7.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
7.6. Pre-defined ACLs
7.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
7.8. Pattern extraction
8. Logging
8.1. Log levels
8.2. Log formats
8.2.1. Default log format
8.2.2. TCP log format
8.2.3. HTTP log format
8.2.4. Custom log format
8.2.5. Error log format
8.3. Advanced logging options
8.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
8.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
8.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
8.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
8.4. Timing events
8.5. Session state at disconnection
8.6. Non-printable characters
8.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
8.8. Capturing HTTP headers
8.9. Examples of logs
9. Statistics and monitoring
9.1. CSV format
9.2. Unix Socket commands
1. Quick reminder about HTTP
----------------------------
When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
on almost anything found in the contents.
However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
1.1. The HTTP transaction model
-------------------------------
The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
will involve a new connection :
[CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
length.
Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
[CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
a smaller value.
A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
page :
[CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
By default HAProxy operates in a tunnel-like mode with regards to persistent
connections: for each connection it processes the first request and forwards
everything else (including additional requests) to selected server. Once
established, the connection is persisted both on the client and server
sides. Use "option http-server-close" to preserve client persistent connections
while handling every incoming request individually, dispatching them one after
another to servers, in HTTP close mode. Use "option httpclose" to switch both
sides to HTTP close mode. "option forceclose" and "option
http-pretend-keepalive" help working around servers misbehaving in HTTP close
mode.
1.2. HTTP request
-----------------
First, let's consider this HTTP request :
Line Contents
number
1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
2 Host: www.mydomain.com
3 User-agent: my small browser
4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
5 Accept: image/png
1.2.1. The Request line
-----------------------
Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
- a METHOD : GET
- a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
- a version tag : HTTP/1.1
All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
The URI itself can have several forms :
- A "relative URI" :
/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
- An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
must accept this form too.
- a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
capabilities.
- an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
other protocols too.
In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
specific to the language, framework or application in use.
1.2.2. The request headers
--------------------------
The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
"Connection:" header).
The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
is one valid form of empty line.
Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
Important note:
As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
1.3. HTTP response
------------------
An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
Line Contents
number
1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
2 Content-length: 350
3 Content-Type: text/html
As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
1.3.1. The Response line
------------------------
Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
- a version tag : HTTP/1.1
- a status code : 200
- a reason : OK
The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
- 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
- 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
- 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
- 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
- 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
or "Authentication Required".
Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
Code When / reason
200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
307 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
308 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
400 for an invalid or too large request
401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
accessing the stats page)
403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
memory allocation failure, which should never happen
502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
4.2).
1.3.2. The response headers
---------------------------
Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
details.
2. Configuring HAProxy
----------------------
2.1. Configuration file format
------------------------------
HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
- the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
- the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
- the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
"frontend" and "backend".
The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
escaped by doubling them.
2.2. Time format
----------------
Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
for every keyword. Supported units are :
- us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
- ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
- s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
- m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
- h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
- d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
2.3. Examples
-------------
# Simple configuration for an HTTP proxy listening on port 80 on all
# interfaces and forwarding requests to a single backend "servers" with a
# single server "server1" listening on 127.0.0.1:8000
global
daemon
maxconn 256
defaults
mode http
timeout connect 5000ms
timeout client 50000ms
timeout server 50000ms
frontend http-in
bind *:80
default_backend servers
backend servers
server server1 127.0.0.1:8000 maxconn 32
# The same configuration defined with a single listen block. Shorter but
# less expressive, especially in HTTP mode.
global
daemon
maxconn 256
defaults
mode http
timeout connect 5000ms
timeout client 50000ms
timeout server 50000ms
listen http-in
bind *:80
server server1 127.0.0.1:8000 maxconn 32
Assuming haproxy is in $PATH, test these configurations in a shell with:
$ sudo haproxy -f configuration.conf -c
3. Global parameters
--------------------
Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
of them have command-line equivalents.
The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
* Process management and security
- ca-base
- chroot
- crt-base
- daemon
- gid
- group
- log
- log-send-hostname
- nbproc
- pidfile
- uid
- ulimit-n
- user
- stats
- node
- description
- unix-bind
* Performance tuning
- maxconn
- maxconnrate
- maxcomprate
- maxcompcpuusage
- maxpipes
- maxsslconn
- noepoll
- nokqueue
- nopoll
- nosplice
- spread-checks
- tune.bufsize
- tune.chksize
- tune.comp.maxlevel
- tune.http.cookielen
- tune.http.maxhdr
- tune.maxaccept
- tune.maxpollevents
- tune.maxrewrite
- tune.pipesize
- tune.rcvbuf.client
- tune.rcvbuf.server
- tune.sndbuf.client
- tune.sndbuf.server
- tune.ssl.cachesize
- tune.ssl.lifetime
- tune.ssl.maxrecord
- tune.zlib.memlevel
- tune.zlib.windowsize
* Debugging
- debug
- quiet
3.1. Process management and security
------------------------------------
ca-base <dir>
Assigns a default directory to fetch SSL CA certificates and CRLs from when a
relative path is used with "ca-file" or "crl-file" directives. Absolute
locations specified in "ca-file" and "crl-file" prevail and ignore "ca-base".
chroot <jail dir>
Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
empty and unwritable to anyone.
cpu-map <"all"|"odd"|"even"|process_num> <cpu-set>...
On Linux 2.6 and above, it is possible to bind a process to a specific CPU
set. This means that the process will never run on other CPUs. The "cpu-map"
directive specifies CPU sets for process sets. The first argument is the
process number to bind. This process must have a number between 1 and 32,
and any process IDs above nbproc are ignored. It is possible to specify all
processes at once using "all", only odd numbers using "odd" or even numbers
using "even", just like with the "bind-process" directive. The second and
forthcoming arguments are CPU sets. Each CPU set is either a unique number
between 0 and 31 or a range with two such numbers delimited by a dash ('-').
Multiple CPU numbers or ranges may be specified, and the processes will be
allowed to bind to all of them. Obviously, multiple "cpu-map" directives may
be specified. Each "cpu-map" directive will replace the previous ones when
they overlap.
crt-base <dir>
Assigns a default directory to fetch SSL certificates from when a relative
path is used with "crtfile" directives. Absolute locations specified after
"crtfile" prevail and ignore "crt-base".
daemon
Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
gid <number>
Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
Note that if haproxy is started from a user having supplementary groups, it
will only be able to drop these groups if started with superuser privileges.
See also "group" and "uid".
group <group name>
Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
See also "gid" and "user".
log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
configured with "log global".
<address> can be one of:
- An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
port).
- An IPv6 address followed by a colon and optionally a UDP port. If
no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
port).
- A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
writeable).
Any part of the address string may reference any number of environment
variables by preceding their name with a dollar sign ('$') and
optionally enclosing them with braces ('{}'), similarly to what is done
in Bourne shell.
<facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
"emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
Eight levels are known :
emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
log-send-hostname [<string>]
Sets the hostname field in the syslog header. If optional "string" parameter
is set the header is set to the string contents, otherwise uses the hostname
of the system. Generally used if one is not relaying logs through an
intermediate syslog server or for simply customizing the hostname printed in
the logs.
log-tag <string>
Sets the tag field in the syslog header to this string. It defaults to the
program name as launched from the command line, which usually is "haproxy".
Sometimes it can be useful to differentiate between multiple processes
running on the same host.
nbproc <number>
Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
pidfile <pidfile>
Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
starting the process. See also "daemon".
stats bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32>[-<number 1-32>] ] ...
Limits the stats socket to a certain set of processes numbers. By default the
stats socket is bound to all processes, causing a warning to be emitted when
nbproc is greater than 1 because there is no way to select the target process
when connecting. However, by using this setting, it becomes possible to pin
the stats socket to a specific set of processes, typically the first one. The
warning will automatically be disabled when this setting is used, whatever
the number of processes used.
stats socket [<address:port>|<path>] [param*]
Binds a UNIX socket to <path> or a TCPv4/v6 address to <address:port>.
Connections to this socket will return various statistics outputs and even
allow some commands to be issued to change some runtime settings. Please
consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
All parameters supported by "bind" lines are supported, for instance to
restrict access to some users or their access rights. Please consult
section 5.1 for more information.
stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
stats maxconn <connections>
By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
uid <number>
Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
one. See also "gid" and "user".
ulimit-n <number>
Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
option.
unix-bind [ prefix <prefix> ] [ mode <mode> ] [ user <user> ] [ uid <uid> ]
[ group <group> ] [ gid <gid> ]
Fixes common settings to UNIX listening sockets declared in "bind" statements.
This is mainly used to simplify declaration of those UNIX sockets and reduce
the risk of errors, since those settings are most commonly required but are
also process-specific. The <prefix> setting can be used to force all socket
path to be relative to that directory. This might be needed to access another
component's chroot. Note that those paths are resolved before haproxy chroots
itself, so they are absolute. The <mode>, <user>, <uid>, <group> and <gid>
all have the same meaning as their homonyms used by the "bind" statement. If
both are specified, the "bind" statement has priority, meaning that the
"unix-bind" settings may be seen as process-wide default settings.
user <user name>
Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
See also "uid" and "group".
node <name>
Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
traffic.
description <text>
Add a text that describes the instance.
Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
"<" and ">" characters.
3.2. Performance tuning
-----------------------
maxconn <number>
Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
maxconnrate <number>
Sets the maximum per-process number of connections per second to <number>.
Proxies will stop accepting connections when this limit is reached. It can be
used to limit the global capacity regardless of each frontend capacity. It is
important to note that this can only be used as a service protection measure,
as there will not necessarily be a fair share between frontends when the
limit is reached, so it's a good idea to also limit each frontend to some
value close to its expected share. Also, lowering tune.maxaccept can improve
fairness.
maxcomprate <number>
Sets the maximum per-process input compression rate to <number> kilobytes
pers second. For each session, if the maximum is reached, the compression
level will be decreased during the session. If the maximum is reached at the
beginning of a session, the session will not compress at all. If the maximum
is not reached, the compression level will be increased up to
tune.comp.maxlevel. A value of zero means there is no limit, this is the
default value.
maxcompcpuusage <number>
Sets the maximum CPU usage HAProxy can reach before stopping the compression
for new requests or decreasing the compression level of current requests.
It works like 'maxcomprate' but measures CPU usage instead of incoming data
bandwidth. The value is expressed in percent of the CPU used by haproxy. In
case of multiple processes (nbproc > 1), each process manages its individual
usage. A value of 100 disable the limit. The default value is 100. Setting
a lower value will prevent the compression work from slowing the whole
process down and from introducing high latencies.
maxpipes <number>
Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
maxsslconn <number>
Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent SSL connections to
<number>. By default there is no SSL-specific limit, which means that the
global maxconn setting will apply to all connections. Setting this limit
avoids having openssl use too much memory and crash when malloc returns NULL
(since it unfortunately does not reliably check for such conditions). Note
that the limit applies both to incoming and outgoing connections, so one
connection which is deciphered then ciphered accounts for 2 SSL connections.
maxzlibmem <number>
Sets the maximum amount of RAM in megabytes per process usable by the zlib.
When the maximum amount is reached, future sessions will not compress as long
as RAM is unavailable. When sets to 0, there is no limit.
The default value is 0. The value is available in bytes on the UNIX socket
with "show info" on the line "MaxZlibMemUsage", the memory used by zlib is
"ZlibMemUsage" in bytes.
noepoll
Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
nokqueue
Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
nopoll
Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nokqueue" and "noepoll".
nosplice
Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
"option splice-response".
spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
tune.bufsize <number>
Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
If HTTP request is larger than (tune.bufsize - tune.maxrewrite), haproxy will
return HTTP 400 (Bad Request) error. Similarly if an HTTP response is larger
than this size, haproxy will return HTTP 502 (Bad Gateway).
tune.chksize <number>
Sets the check buffer size to this size (in bytes). Higher values may help
find string or regex patterns in very large pages, though doing so may imply
more memory and CPU usage. The default value is 16384 and can be changed at
build time. It is not recommended to change this value, but to use better
checks whenever possible.
tune.comp.maxlevel <number>
Sets the maximum compression level. The compression level affects CPU
usage during compression. This value affects CPU usage during compression.
Each session using compression initializes the compression algorithm with
this value. The default value is 1.
tune.http.cookielen <number>
Sets the maximum length of captured cookies. This is the maximum value that
the "capture cookie xxx len yyy" will be allowed to take, and any upper value
will automatically be truncated to this one. It is important not to set too
high a value because all cookie captures still allocate this size whatever
their configured value (they share a same pool). This value is per request
per response, so the memory allocated is twice this value per connection.
When not specified, the limit is set to 63 characters. It is recommended not
to change this value.
tune.http.maxhdr <number>
Sets the maximum number of headers in a request. When a request comes with a
number of headers greater than this value (including the first line), it is
rejected with a "400 Bad Request" status code. Similarly, too large responses
are blocked with "502 Bad Gateway". The default value is 101, which is enough
for all usages, considering that the widely deployed Apache server uses the
same limit. It can be useful to push this limit further to temporarily allow
a buggy application to work by the time it gets fixed. Keep in mind that each
new header consumes 32bits of memory for each session, so don't push this
limit too high.
tune.maxaccept <number>
Sets the maximum number of consecutive connections a process may accept in a
row before switching to other work. In single process mode, higher numbers
give better performance at high connection rates. However in multi-process
modes, keeping a bit of fairness between processes generally is better to
increase performance. This value applies individually to each listener, so
that the number of processes a listener is bound to is taken into account.
This value defaults to 64. In multi-process mode, it is divided by twice
the number of processes the listener is bound to. Setting this value to -1
completely disables the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak
this value.
tune.maxpollevents <number>
Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
tune.maxrewrite <number>
Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
bufsize.
tune.pipesize <number>
Sets the kernel pipe buffer size to this size (in bytes). By default, pipes
are the default size for the system. But sometimes when using TCP splicing,
it can improve performance to increase pipe sizes, especially if it is
suspected that pipes are not filled and that many calls to splice() are
performed. This has an impact on the kernel's memory footprint, so this must
not be changed if impacts are not understood.
tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
tune.sndbuf.client <number>
tune.sndbuf.server <number>
Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
notifying haproxy again.
tune.ssl.cachesize <number>
Sets the size of the global SSL session cache, in a number of blocks. A block
is large enough to contain an encoded session without peer certificate.
An encoded session with peer certificate is stored in multiple blocks
depending on the size of the peer certificate. A block use approximatively
200 bytes of memory. The default value may be forced at build time, otherwise
defaults to 20000. When the cache is full, the most idle entries are purged
and reassigned. Higher values reduce the occurrence of such a purge, hence
the number of CPU-intensive SSL handshakes by ensuring that all users keep
their session as long as possible. All entries are pre-allocated upon startup
and are shared between all processes if "nbproc" is greater than 1. Setting
this value to 0 disables the SSL session cache.
tune.ssl.lifetime <timeout>
Sets how long a cached SSL session may remain valid. This time is expressed
in seconds and defaults to 300 (5 mn). It is important to understand that it
does not guarantee that sessions will last that long, because if the cache is
full, the longest idle sessions will be purged despite their configured
lifetime. The real usefulness of this setting is to prevent sessions from
being used for too long.
tune.ssl.maxrecord <number>
Sets the maximum amount of bytes passed to SSL_write() at a time. Default
value 0 means there is no limit. Over SSL/TLS, the client can decipher the
data only once it has received a full record. With large records, it means
that clients might have to download up to 16kB of data before starting to
process them. Limiting the value can improve page load times on browsers
located over high latency or low bandwidth networks. It is suggested to find
optimal values which fit into 1 or 2 TCP segments (generally 1448 bytes over
Ethernet with TCP timestamps enabled, or 1460 when timestamps are disabled),
keeping in mind that SSL/TLS add some overhead. Typical values of 1419 and
2859 gave good results during tests. Use "strace -e trace=write" to find the
best value.
tune.zlib.memlevel <number>
Sets the memLevel parameter in zlib initialization for each session. It
defines how much memory should be allocated for the intenal compression
state. A value of 1 uses minimum memory but is slow and reduces compression
ratio, a value of 9 uses maximum memory for optimal speed. Can be a value
between 1 and 9. The default value is 8.
tune.zlib.windowsize <number>
Sets the window size (the size of the history buffer) as a parameter of the
zlib initialization for each session. Larger values of this parameter result
in better compression at the expense of memory usage. Can be a value between
8 and 15. The default value is 15.
3.3. Debugging
--------------
debug
Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
system startup.
quiet
Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
line argument "-q".
3.4. Userlists
--------------
It is possible to control access to frontend/backend/listen sections or to
http stats by allowing only authenticated and authorized users. To do this,
it is required to create at least one userlist and to define users.
userlist <listname>
Creates new userlist with name <listname>. Many independent userlists can be
used to store authentication & authorization data for independent customers.
group <groupname> [users <user>,<user>,(...)]
Adds group <groupname> to the current userlist. It is also possible to
attach users to this group by using a comma separated list of names
proceeded by "users" keyword.
user <username> [password|insecure-password <password>]
[groups <group>,<group>,(...)]
Adds user <username> to the current userlist. Both secure (encrypted) and
insecure (unencrypted) passwords can be used. Encrypted passwords are
evaluated using the crypt(3) function so depending of the system's
capabilities, different algorithms are supported. For example modern Glibc
based Linux system supports MD5, SHA-256, SHA-512 and of course classic,
DES-based method of crypting passwords.
Example:
userlist L1
group G1 users tiger,scott
group G2 users xdb,scott
user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za9667qe4(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91
user scott insecure-password elgato
user xdb insecure-password hello
userlist L2
group G1
group G2
user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91 groups G1
user scott insecure-password elgato groups G1,G2
user xdb insecure-password hello groups G2
Please note that both lists are functionally identical.
3.5. Peers
----------
It is possible to synchronize server entries in stick tables between several
haproxy instances over TCP connections in a multi-master fashion. Each instance
pushes its local updates and insertions to remote peers. Server IDs are used to
identify servers remotely, so it is important that configurations look similar
or at least that the same IDs are forced on each server on all participants.
Interrupted exchanges are automatically detected and recovered from the last
known point. In addition, during a soft restart, the old process connects to
the new one using such a TCP connection to push all its entries before the new
process tries to connect to other peers. That ensures very fast replication
during a reload, it typically takes a fraction of a second even for large
tables.
peers <peersect>
Creates a new peer list with name <peersect>. It is an independent section,
which is referenced by one or more stick-tables.
peer <peername> <ip>:<port>
Defines a peer inside a peers section.
If <peername> is set to the local peer name (by default hostname, or forced
using "-L" command line option), haproxy will listen for incoming remote peer
connection on <ip>:<port>. Otherwise, <ip>:<port> defines where to connect to
to join the remote peer, and <peername> is used at the protocol level to
identify and validate the remote peer on the server side.
During a soft restart, local peer <ip>:<port> is used by the old instance to
connect the new one and initiate a complete replication (teaching process).
It is strongly recommended to have the exact same peers declaration on all
peers and to only rely on the "-L" command line argument to change the local
peer name. This makes it easier to maintain coherent configuration files
across all peers.
Any part of the address string may reference any number of environment
variables by preceding their name with a dollar sign ('$') and optionally
enclosing them with braces ('{}'), similarly to what is done in Bourne shell.
Example:
peers mypeers
peer haproxy1 192.168.0.1:1024
peer haproxy2 192.168.0.2:1024
peer haproxy3 10.2.0.1:1024
backend mybackend
mode tcp
balance roundrobin
stick-table type ip size 20k peers mypeers
stick on src
server srv1 192.168.0.30:80
server srv2 192.168.0.31:80
4. Proxies
----------
Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
- defaults <name>
- frontend <name>
- backend <name>
- listen <name>
A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
connections.
A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
to forward incoming connections.
A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
arbitrary criteria.
4.1. Proxy keywords matrix
--------------------------
The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
marked with "(*)" can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
specified in a previous "defaults" section.
keyword defaults frontend listen backend
------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
acl - X X X
appsession - - X X
backlog X X X -
balance X - X X
bind - X X -
bind-process X X X X
block - X X X
capture cookie - X X -
capture request header - X X -
capture response header - X X -
clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
compression X X X X
contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
cookie X - X X
default-server X - X X
default_backend X X X -
description - X X X
disabled X X X X
dispatch - - X X
enabled X X X X
errorfile X X X X
errorloc X X X X
errorloc302 X X X X
-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
errorloc303 X X X X
force-persist - X X X
fullconn X - X X
grace X X X X
hash-type X - X X
http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
http-check expect - - X X
http-check send-state X - X X
http-request - X X X
id - X X X
ignore-persist - X X X
log (*) X X X X
maxconn X X X -
mode X X X X
monitor fail - X X -
monitor-net X X X -
monitor-uri X X X -
option abortonclose (*) X - X X
option accept-invalid-http-request (*) X X X -
option accept-invalid-http-response (*) X - X X
option allbackups (*) X - X X
option checkcache (*) X - X X
option clitcpka (*) X X X -
option contstats (*) X X X -
option dontlog-normal (*) X X X -
option dontlognull (*) X X X -
option forceclose (*) X X X X
-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
option forwardfor X X X X
option http-no-delay (*) X X X X
option http-pretend-keepalive (*) X X X X
option http-server-close (*) X X X X
option http-use-proxy-header (*) X X X -
option httpchk X - X X
option httpclose (*) X X X X
option httplog X X X X
option http_proxy (*) X X X X
option independent-streams (*) X X X X
option lb-agent-chk X - X X
option ldap-check X - X X
option log-health-checks (*) X - X X
option log-separate-errors (*) X X X -
option logasap (*) X X X -
option mysql-check X - X X
option pgsql-check X - X X
option nolinger (*) X X X X
option originalto X X X X
option persist (*) X - X X
option redispatch (*) X - X X
option redis-check X - X X
option smtpchk X - X X
option socket-stats (*) X X X -
option splice-auto (*) X X X X
option splice-request (*) X X X X
option splice-response (*) X X X X
option srvtcpka (*) X - X X
option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
option tcp-smart-accept (*) X X X -
option tcp-smart-connect (*) X - X X
option tcpka X X X X
option tcplog X X X X
option transparent (*) X - X X
persist rdp-cookie X - X X
rate-limit sessions X X X -
redirect - X X X
redisp (deprecated) X - X X
redispatch (deprecated) X - X X
reqadd - X X X
reqallow - X X X
reqdel - X X X
reqdeny - X X X
reqiallow - X X X
reqidel - X X X
reqideny - X X X
reqipass - X X X
reqirep - X X X
reqisetbe - X X X
reqitarpit - X X X
reqpass - X X X
reqrep - X X X
-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
reqsetbe - X X X
reqtarpit - X X X
retries X - X X
rspadd - X X X
rspdel - X X X
rspdeny - X X X
rspidel - X X X
rspideny - X X X
rspirep - X X X
rsprep - X X X
server - - X X
source X - X X
srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
stats admin - - X X
stats auth X - X X
stats enable X - X X
stats hide-version X - X X
stats http-request - - X X
stats realm X - X X
stats refresh X - X X
stats scope X - X X
stats show-desc X - X X
stats show-legends X - X X
stats show-node X - X X
stats uri X - X X
-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
stick match - - X X
stick on - - X X
stick store-request - - X X
stick store-response - - X X
stick-table - - X X
tcp-request connection - X X -
tcp-request content - X X X
tcp-request inspect-delay - X X X
tcp-response content - - X X
tcp-response inspect-delay - - X X
timeout check X - X X
timeout client X X X -
timeout clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
timeout connect X - X X
timeout contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
timeout http-request X X X X
timeout queue X - X X
timeout server X - X X
timeout srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
timeout tarpit X X X X
timeout tunnel X - X X
transparent (deprecated) X - X X
unique-id-format X X X -
unique-id-header X X X -
use_backend - X X -
use-server - - X X
------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
keyword defaults frontend listen backend
4.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
---------------------------------------------
This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
Declare or complete an access list.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Example:
acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
See section 7 about ACL usage.
appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
[request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
<length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
checked in each cookie value.
<holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
milliseconds.
request-learn
If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
the application's session and the correct server is selected.
It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
data following this prefix.
Example :
appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
2 modes are currently supported :
- path-parameters :
The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
This is the default mode if the option is not set.
- query-string :
In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
query string.
When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
Note : Consider not using this feature in multi-process mode (nbproc > 1)
unless you know what you do : memory is not shared between the
processes, which can result in random behaviours.
Example :
appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick", "stick-table",
"ignore-persist", "nbproc" and "bind-process".
backlog <conns>
Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
backlog parameter.
On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
it, so that you don't worry.
static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
run (around -1%).
leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
first The first server with available connection slots receives the
connection. The servers are choosen from the lowest numeric
identifier to the highest (see server parameter "id"), which
defaults to the server's position in the farm. Once a server
reaches its maxconn value, the next server is used. It does
not make sense to use this algorithm without setting maxconn.
The purpose of this algorithm is to always use the smallest
number of servers so that extra servers can be powered off
during non-intensive hours. This algorithm ignores the server
weight, and brings more benefit to long session such as RDP
or IMAP than HTTP, though it can be useful there too. In
order to use this algorithm efficiently, it is recommended
that a cloud controller regularly checks server usage to turn
them off when unused, and regularly checks backend queue to
turn new servers on when the queue inflates. Alternatively,
using "http-check send-state" may inform servers on the load.
source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
weight of the running servers to designate which server will
receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
address will always reach the same server as long as no
server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
number of running servers changing, many clients will be
directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
static by default, which means that changing a server's
weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
changed using "hash-type".
uri This algorithm hashes either the left part of the URI (before
the question mark) or the whole URI (if the "whole" parameter
is present) and divides the hash value by the total weight of
the running servers. The result designates which server will
receive the request. This ensures that the same URI will
always be directed to the same server as long as no server
goes up or down. This is used with proxy caches and
anti-virus proxies in order to maximize the cache hit rate.
Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP backend.
This algorithm is static by default, which means that
changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
but this can be changed using "hash-type".
This algorithm supports two optional parameters "len" and
"depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
URIs start with a leading "/".
The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
evaluation stops when either is reached.
url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
the query string of each HTTP GET request.
If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
when it is not found in a query string after a question mark
('?') in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
<max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
be randomly balanced if at all.
If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
weight of the running servers. The result designates which
server will receive the request.
This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
hdr(<name>) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP
request. Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function,
the header name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the
header is absent or if it does not contain any value, the
roundrobin algorithm is applied instead.
An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
This algorithm is static by default, which means that
changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
but this can be changed using "hash-type".
rdp-cookie
rdp-cookie(<name>)
The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
used instead.
Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
This algorithm is static by default, which means that
changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
but this can be changed using "hash-type".
See also the rdp_cookie pattern fetch function.
<arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
optional argument.
balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
for each backend.
Examples :
balance roundrobin
balance url_param userid
balance url_param session_id check_post 64
balance hdr(User-Agent)
balance hdr(host)
balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
extension with "url_param" must be considered :
- all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
- using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
defaults to 16 kB.
- Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
- Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
Round Robin.
- Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
actually appeared in the first chunk).
- This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
- In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
type message bodies.
See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
"http_proxy".
bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] [param*]
bind /<path> [, ...] [param*]
Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
special address "0.0.0.0". The IPv6 equivalent is '::'.
Optionally, an address family prefix may be used before the
address to force the family regardless of the address format,
which can be useful to specify a path to a unix socket with
no slash ('/'). Currently supported prefixes are :
- 'ipv4@' -> address is always IPv4
- 'ipv6@' -> address is always IPv6
- 'unix@' -> address is a path to a local unix socket
- 'fd@<n>' -> use file descriptor <n> inherited from the
parent. The fd must be bound and may or may not already
be listening.
Any part of the address string may reference any number of
environment variables by preceding their name with a dollar
sign ('$') and optionally enclosing them with braces ('{}'),
similarly to what is done in Bourne shell.
<port_range> is either a unique TCP port, or a port range for which the
proxy will accept connections for the IP address specified
above. The port is mandatory for TCP listeners. Note that in
the case of an IPv6 address, the port is always the number
after the last colon (':'). A range can either be :
- a numerical port (ex: '80')
- a dash-delimited ports range explicitly stating the lower
and upper bounds (ex: '2000-2100') which are included in
the range.
Particular care must be taken against port ranges, because
every <address:port> couple consumes one socket (= a file
descriptor), so it's easy to consume lots of descriptors
with a simple range, and to run out of sockets. Also, each
<address:port> couple must be used only once among all
instances running on a same system. Please note that binding
to ports lower than 1024 generally require particular
privileges to start the program, which are independent of
the 'uid' parameter.
<path> is a UNIX socket path beginning with a slash ('/'). This is
alternative to the TCP listening port. Haproxy will then
receive UNIX connections on the socket located at this place.
The path must begin with a slash and by default is absolute.
It can be relative to the prefix defined by "unix-bind" in
the global section. Note that the total length of the prefix
followed by the socket path cannot exceed some system limits
for UNIX sockets, which commonly are set to 107 characters.
<param*> is a list of parameters common to all sockets declared on the
same line. These numerous parameters depend on OS and build
options and have a complete section dedicated to them. Please
refer to section 5 to for more details.
It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
in a frontend.
Example :
listen http_proxy
bind :80,:443
bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
bind /var/run/ssl-frontend.sock user root mode 600 accept-proxy
listen http_https_proxy
bind :80
bind :443 ssl crt /etc/haproxy/site.pem
listen http_https_proxy_explicit
bind ipv6@:80
bind ipv4@public_ssl:443 ssl crt /etc/haproxy/site.pem
bind unix@ssl-frontend.sock user root mode 600 accept-proxy
listen external_bind_app1
bind fd@${FD_APP1}
See also : "source", "option forwardfor", "unix-bind" and the PROXY protocol
documentation, and section 5 about bind options.
bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32>[-<number 1-32>] ] ...
Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
may be used to override a default value.
odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
option may be combined with other numbers.
even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
missing from all processes.
number The instance will be enabled on this process number or range,
whose values must all be between 1 and 32. You must be
careful not to reference a process number greater than the
configured global.nbproc, otherwise some instances might be
missing from all processes.
This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
and 'even' instances.
At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
32.
If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
Example :
listen app_ip1
bind 10.0.0.1:80
bind-process odd
listen app_ip2
bind 10.0.0.2:80
bind-process even
listen management
bind 10.0.0.3:80
bind-process 1 2 3 4
listen management
bind 10.0.0.4:80
bind-process 1-4
See also : "nbproc" in global section.
block { if | unless } <condition>
Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
typically used to deny access to certain sensitive resources if some
conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
"block" statements per instance.
Example:
acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
block if invalid_src || local_dst
See section 7 about ACL usage.
capture cookie <name> len <length>
Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
<length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
right if it exceeds <length>.
Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
"set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
"capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is set
by the global "tune.http.cookielen" setting and defaults to 63 characters. It
is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
Example:
capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
section 8 about logging.
capture request header <name> len <length>
Capture and log the last occurrence of the specified request header.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
<length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
it exceeds <length>.
The complete value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
"Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
environments to find where the request came from.
Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
braces.
There is no limit to the number of captured request headers nor to their
length, though it is wise to keep them low to limit memory usage per session.
In order to keep log format consistent for a same frontend, header captures
can only be declared in a frontend. It is not possible to specify a capture
in a "defaults" section.
Example:
capture request header Host len 15
capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
capture request header Referrer len 15
See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
about logging.
capture response header <name> len <length>
Capture and log the last occurrence of the specified response header.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
<length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
it exceeds <length>.
The complete value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
"Location" header to track redirections.
There is no limit to the number of captured response headers nor to their
length, though it is wise to keep them low to limit memory usage per session.
In order to keep log format consistent for a same frontend, header captures
can only be declared in a frontend. It is not possible to specify a capture
in a "defaults" section.
Example:
capture response header Content-length len 9
capture response header Location len 15
See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
about logging.
clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
(and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
(eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
"defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
Please use "timeout client" instead.
See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
"srvtimeout".
compression algo <algorithm> ...
compression type <mime type> ...
compression offload
Enable HTTP compression.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
algo is followed by the list of supported compression algorithms.
type is followed by the list of MIME types that will be compressed.
offload makes haproxy work as a compression offloader only (see notes).
The currently supported algorithms are :
identity this is mostly for debugging, and it was useful for developing
the compression feature. Identity does not apply any change on
data.
gzip applies gzip compression. This setting is only available when
support for zlib was built in.
deflate same as gzip, but with deflate algorithm and zlib format.
Note that this algorithm has ambiguous support on many browsers
and no support at all from recent ones. It is strongly
recommended not to use it for anything else than experimentation.
This setting is only available when support for zlib was built
in.
Compression will be activated depending on the Accept-Encoding request
header. With identity, it does not take care of that header.
If backend servers support HTTP compression, these directives
will be no-op: haproxy will see the compressed response and will not
compress again. If backend servers do not support HTTP compression and
there is Accept-Encoding header in request, haproxy will compress the
matching response.
The "offload" setting makes haproxy remove the Accept-Encoding header to
prevent backend servers from compressing responses. It is strongly
recommended not to do this because this means that all the compression work
will be done on the single point where haproxy is located. However in some
deployment scenarios, haproxy may be installed in front of a buggy gateway
with broken HTTP compression implementation which can't be turned off.
In that case haproxy can be used to prevent that gateway from emitting
invalid payloads. In this case, simply removing the header in the
configuration does not work because it applies before the header is parsed,
so that prevents haproxy from compressing. The "offload" setting should
then be used for such scenarios.
Compression is disabled when:
* the request does not advertise a supported compression algorithm in the
"Accept-Encoding" header
* the response message is not HTTP/1.1
* HTTP status code is not 200
* response contain neither a "Content-Length" header nor a
"Transfer-Encoding" whose last value is "chunked"
* response contains a "Content-Type" header whose first value starts with
"multipart"
* the response contains the "no-transform" value in the "Cache-control"
header
* User-Agent matches "Mozilla/4" unless it is MSIE 6 with XP SP2, or MSIE 7
and later
* The response contains a "Content-Encoding" header, indicating that the
response is already compressed (see compression offload)
Note: The compression does not rewrite Etag headers, and does not emit the
Warning header.
Examples :
compression algo gzip
compression type text/html text/plain
contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
"defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
instead.
See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
"timeout server", "contimeout".
cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
[ postonly ] [ preserve ] [ httponly ] [ secure ]
[ domain <domain> ]* [ maxidle <idle> ] [ maxlife <life> ]
Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
headers is left to the application. The application can then
decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
"insert" and "prefix".
insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
be inserted by haproxy in server responses if the client did not
already have a cookie that would have permitted it to access this
server. When used without the "preserve" option, if the server
emits a cookie with the same name, it will be remove before
processing. For this reason, this mode can be used to upgrade
existing configurations running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie
will only be a session cookie and will not be stored on the
client's disk. By default, unless the "indirect" option is added,
the server will see the cookies emitted by the client. Due to
caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "nocache" or
"postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert" keyword is not
compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
does not support more than one single cookie and the application
already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert". Note: it is highly
recommended not to use "indirect" with "prefix", otherwise server
cookie updates would not be sent to clients.
indirect When this option is specified, no cookie will be emitted to a
client which already has a valid one for the server which has
processed the request. If the server sets such a cookie itself,
it will be removed, unless the "preserve" option is also set. In
"insert" mode, this will additionally remove cookies from the
requests transmitted to the server, making the persistence
mechanism totally transparent from an application point of view.
Note: it is highly recommended not to use "indirect" with
"prefix", otherwise server cookie updates would not be sent to
clients.
nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
"nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
persistence cookie in the cache.
See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
preserve This option may only be used with "insert" and/or "indirect". It
allows the server to emit the persistence cookie itself. In this
case, if a cookie is found in the response, haproxy will leave it
untouched. This is useful in order to end persistence after a
logout request for instance. For this, the server just has to
emit a cookie with an invalid value (eg: empty) or with a date in
the past. By combining this mechanism with the "disable-on-404"
check option, it is possible to perform a completely graceful
shutdown because users will definitely leave the server after
they logout.
httponly This option tells haproxy to add an "HttpOnly" cookie attribute
when a cookie is inserted. This attribute is used so that a
user agent doesn't share the cookie with non-HTTP components.
Please check RFC6265 for more information on this attribute.
secure This option tells haproxy to add a "Secure" cookie attribute when
a cookie is inserted. This attribute is used so that a user agent
never emits this cookie over non-secure channels, which means
that a cookie learned with this flag will be presented only over
SSL/TLS connections. Please check RFC6265 for more information on
this attribute.
domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
maxidle This option allows inserted cookies to be ignored after some idle
time. It only works with insert-mode cookies. When a cookie is
sent to the client, the date this cookie was emitted is sent too.
Upon further presentations of this cookie, if the date is older
than the delay indicated by the parameter (in seconds), it will
be ignored. Otherwise, it will be refreshed if needed when the
response is sent to the client. This is particularly useful to
prevent users who never close their browsers from remaining for
too long on the same server (eg: after a farm size change). When
this option is set and a cookie has no date, it is always
accepted, but gets refreshed in the response. This maintains the
ability for admins to access their sites. Cookies that have a
date in the future further than 24 hours are ignored. Doing so
lets admins fix timezone issues without risking kicking users off
the site.
maxlife This option allows inserted cookies to be ignored after some life
time, whether they're in use or not. It only works with insert
mode cookies. When a cookie is first sent to the client, the date
this cookie was emitted is sent too. Upon further presentations
of this cookie, if the date is older than the delay indicated by
the parameter (in seconds), it will be ignored. If the cookie in
the request has no date, it is accepted and a date will be set.
Cookies that have a date in the future further than 24 hours are
ignored. Doing so lets admins fix timezone issues without risking
kicking users off the site. Contrary to maxidle, this value is
not refreshed, only the first visit date counts. Both maxidle and
maxlife may be used at the time. This is particularly useful to
prevent users who never close their browsers from remaining for
too long on the same server (eg: after a farm size change). This
is stronger than the maxidle method in that it forces a
redispatch after some absolute delay.
There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Examples :
cookie JSESSIONID prefix
cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
cookie SRV insert indirect nocache maxidle 30m maxlife 8h
See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server"
and "ignore-persist".
default-server [param*]
Change default options for a server in a backend
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments:
<param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
details.
Example :
default-server inter 1000 weight 13
See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
default_backend <backend>
Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<backend> is the name of the backend to use.
When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
"use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
will catch all undetermined requests.
Example :
use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
default_backend dynamic
See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
disabled
Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
keyword in a "defaults" section.
See also : "enabled"
dispatch <address>:<port>
Set a default server address
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<address> is the IPv4 address of the default server. Alternatively, a
resolvable hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved
during start-up.
<ports> is a mandatory port specification. All connections will be sent
to this port, and it is not permitted to use port offsets as is
possible with normal servers.
The "dispatch" keyword designates a default server for use when no other
server can take the connection. In the past it was used to forward non
persistent connections to an auxiliary load balancer. Due to its simple
syntax, it has also been used for simple TCP relays. It is recommended not to
use it for more clarity, and to use the "server" directive instead.
See also : "server"
enabled
Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
See also : "disabled"
errorfile <code> <file>
Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
generating codes 200, 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
<file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
before any chroot is performed.
It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
Code 200 is emitted in response to requests matching a "monitor-uri" rule.
The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
files returning the same contents as default errors.
The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
Example :
errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
errorloc <code> <url>
errorloc302 <code> <url>
Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
generating codes 200, 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
<url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
Code 200 is emitted in response to requests matching a "monitor-uri" rule.
Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
request.
See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
errorloc303 <code> <url>
Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
<url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
Code 200 is emitted in response to requests matching a "monitor-uri" rule.
Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
marked down for maintenance operations.
The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
"unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
is used.
See also : "option redispatch", "ignore-persist", "persist",
and section 7 about ACL usage.
fullconn <conns>
Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
servers use the maximal number of connections.
When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
"minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
exceptional loads.
Since it's hard to get this value right, haproxy automatically sets it to
10% of the sum of the maxconns of all frontends that may branch to this
backend. That way it's safe to leave it unset.
Example :
# The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
# and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
# connections.
backend dynamic
fullconn 10000
server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
See also : "maxconn", "server"
grace <time>
Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
simplify it.
hash-type <method>
Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
avalanche this mechanism uses the default map-based hashing described
above but applies a full avalanche hash before performing the
mapping. The result is a slightly less smooth hash for most
situations, but the hash becomes better than pure map-based
hashes when the number of servers is a multiple of the size of
the input set. When using URI hash with a number of servers
multiple of 64, it's desirable to change the hash type to
this value.
consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
important that all servers have the same IDs.
The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
See also : "balance", "server"
http-check disable-on-404
Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option. If this option
is used with "http-check expect", then it has precedence over it so that 404
responses will still be considered as soft-stop.
See also : "option httpchk", "http-check expect"
http-check expect [!] <match> <pattern>
Make HTTP health checks consider response contents or specific status codes
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<match> is a keyword indicating how to look for a specific pattern in the
response. The keyword may be one of "status", "rstatus",
"string", or "rstring". The keyword may be preceded by an
exclamation mark ("!") to negate the match. Spaces are allowed
between the exclamation mark and the keyword. See below for more
details on the supported keywords.
<pattern> is the pattern to look for. It may be a string or a regular
expression. If the pattern contains spaces, they must be escaped
with the usual backslash ('\').
By default, "option httpchk" considers that response statuses 2xx and 3xx
are valid, and that others are invalid. When "http-check expect" is used,
it defines what is considered valid or invalid. Only one "http-check"
statement is supported in a backend. If a server fails to respond or times
out, the check obviously fails. The available matches are :
status <string> : test the exact string match for the HTTP status code.
A health check response will be considered valid if the
response's status code is exactly this string. If the
"status" keyword is prefixed with "!", then the response
will be considered invalid if the status code matches.
rstatus <regex> : test a regular expression for the HTTP status code.
A health check response will be considered valid if the
response's status code matches the expression. If the
"rstatus" keyword is prefixed with "!", then the response
will be considered invalid if the status code matches.
This is mostly used to check for multiple codes.
string <string> : test the exact string match in the HTTP response body.
A health check response will be considered valid if the
response's body contains this exact string. If the
"string" keyword is prefixed with "!", then the response
will be considered invalid if the body contains this
string. This can be used to look for a mandatory word at
the end of a dynamic page, or to detect a failure when a
specific error appears on the check page (eg: a stack
trace).
rstring <regex> : test a regular expression on the HTTP response body.
A health check response will be considered valid if the
response's body matches this expression. If the "rstring"
keyword is prefixed with "!", then the response will be
considered invalid if the body matches the expression.
This can be used to look for a mandatory word at the end
of a dynamic page, or to detect a failure when a specific
error appears on the check page (eg: a stack trace).
It is important to note that the responses will be limited to a certain size
defined by the global "tune.chksize" option, which defaults to 16384 bytes.
Thus, too large responses may not contain the mandatory pattern when using
"string" or "rstring". If a large response is absolutely required, it is
possible to change the default max size by setting the global variable.
However, it is worth keeping in mind that parsing very large responses can
waste some CPU cycles, especially when regular expressions are used, and that
it is always better to focus the checks on smaller resources.
Last, if "http-check expect" is combined with "http-check disable-on-404",
then this last one has precedence when the server responds with 404.
Examples :
# only accept status 200 as valid
http-check expect status 200
# consider SQL errors as errors
http-check expect ! string SQL\ Error
# consider status 5xx only as errors
http-check expect ! rstatus ^5
# check that we have a correct hexadecimal tag before /html
http-check expect rstring <!--tag:[0-9a-f]*</html>
See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
http-check send-state
Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
"X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
- a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
checked in multiple backends.
- a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
- a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
one fails.
- a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
connections on all servers of the same backend.
- a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
server's queue.
Example of a header received by the application server :
>>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
scur=13/22; qcur=0
See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
http-request { allow | deny | tarpit | auth [realm <realm>] | redirect <rule> |
add-header <name> <fmt> | set-header <name> <fmt> }
[ { if | unless } <condition> ]
Access control for Layer 7 requests
May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
The http-request statement defines a set of rules which apply to layer 7
processing. The rules are evaluated in their declaration order when they are
met in a frontend, listen or backend section. Any rule may optionally be
followed by an ACL-based condition, in which case it will only be evaluated
if the condition is true.
The first keyword is the rule's action. Currently supported actions include :
- "allow" : this stops the evaluation of the rules and lets the request
pass the check. No further "http-request" rules are evaluated.
- "deny" : this stops the evaluation of the rules and immediately rejects
the request and emits an HTTP 403 error. No further "http-request" rules
are evaluated.
- "tarpit" : this stops the evaluation of the rules and immediately blocks
the request without responding for a delay specified by "timeout tarpit"
or "timeout connect" if the former is not set. After that delay, if the
client is still connected, an HTTP error 500 is returned so that the
client does not suspect it has been tarpitted. Logs will report the flags
"PT". The goal of the tarpit rule is to slow down robots during an attack
when they're limited on the number of concurrent requests. It can be very
efficient against very dumb robots, and will significantly reduce the
load on firewalls compared to a "deny" rule. But when facing "correctly"
developped robots, it can make things worse by forcing haproxy and the
front firewall to support insane number of concurrent connections.
- "auth" : this stops the evaluation of the rules and immediately responds
with an HTTP 401 or 407 error code to invite the user to present a valid
user name and password. No further "http-request" rules are evaluated. An
optional "realm" parameter is supported, it sets the authentication realm
that is returned with the response (typically the application's name).
- "redirect" : this performs an HTTP redirection based on a redirect rule.
This is exactly the same as the "redirect" statement except that it
inserts a redirect rule which can be processed in the middle of other
"http-request" rules. See the "redirect" keyword for the rule's syntax.
- "add-header" appends an HTTP header field whose name is specified in
<name> and whose value is defined by <fmt> which follows the log-format
rules (see Custom Log Format in section 8.2.4). This is particularly
useful to pass connection-specific information to the server (eg: the
client's SSL certificate), or to combine several headers into one. This
rule is not final, so it is possible to add other similar rules. Note
that header addition is performed immediately, so one rule might reuse
the resulting header from a previous rule.
- "set-header" does the same as "add-header" except that the header name
is first removed if it existed. This is useful when passing security
information to the server, where the header must not be manipulated by
external users.
There is no limit to the number of http-request statements per instance.
It is important to know that http-request rules are processed very early in
the HTTP processing, just after "block" rules and before "reqdel" or "reqrep"
rules. That way, headers added by "add-header"/"set-header" are visible by
almost all further ACL rules.
Example:
acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)
http-request allow if nagios
http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
http-request deny
Example:
acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
http-request auth unless auth_ok
Example:
http-request set-header X-Haproxy-Current-Date %T
http-request set-header X-SSL %[ssl_fc]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Session_ID %[ssl_fc_session_id]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Client-Verify %[ssl_c_verify]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Client-DN %{+Q}[ssl_c_s_dn]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Client-CN %{+Q}[ssl_c_s_dn(cn)]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Issuer %{+Q}[ssl_c_i_dn]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Client-NotBefore %{+Q}[ssl_c_notbefore]
http-request set-header X-SSL-Client-NotAfter %{+Q}[ssl_c_notafter]
See also : "stats http-request", section 3.4 about userlists and section 7
about ACL usage.
http-send-name-header [<header>]
Add the server name to a request. Use the header string given by <header>
May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<header> The header string to use to send the server name
The "http-send-name-header" statement causes the name of the target
server to be added to the headers of an HTTP request. The name
is added with the header string proved.
See also : "server"
id <value>
Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
ignore-persist { if | unless } <condition>
Declare a condition to ignore persistence
May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
By default, when cookie persistence is enabled, every requests containing
the cookie are unconditionally persistent (assuming the target server is up
and running).
The "ignore-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore persistence.
This is sometimes useful to load balance requests for static files, which
oftenly don't require persistence. This can also be used to fully disable
persistence for a specific User-Agent (for example, some web crawler bots).
Combined with "appsession", it can also help reduce HAProxy memory usage, as
the appsession table won't grow if persistence is ignored.
The persistence is ignored when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
"unless" condition is met.
See also : "force-persist", "cookie", and section 7 about ACL usage.
log global
log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
no log
Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Prefix :
no should be used when the logger list must be flushed. For example,
if you don't want to inherit from the default logger list. This
prefix does not allow arguments.
Arguments :
global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
parameter.
<address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
- An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
standard syslog port).
- An IPv6 address followed by a colon (':') and optionally a UDP
port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
standard syslog port).
- A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
appropriately writeable).
Any part of the address string may reference any number of
environment variables by preceding their name with a dollar
sign ('$') and optionally enclosing them with braces ('{}'),
similarly to what is done in Bourne shell.
<facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
<level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
messages with a severity at least as important as this level
will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
Eight levels are known :
emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
It is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides what to
log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log entries
from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level "info".
However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
"warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
being emitted.
Example :
log global
log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
log ${LOCAL_SYSLOG}:514 local0 notice # send to local server
log-format <string>
Allows you to custom a log line.
See also : Custom Log Format (8.2.4)
maxconn <conns>
Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
closes.
If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
properly tuned.
Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
By default, this value is set to 2000.
See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
mode { tcp|http|health }
Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
brings HAProxy most of its value.
health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
to incoming connections and close the connection. Alternatively,
If the "httpchk" option is set, "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" will be sent
instead. Nothing will be logged in either case. This mode is used
to reply to external components health checks. This mode is
deprecated and should not be used anymore as it is possible to do
the same and even better by combining TCP or HTTP modes with the
"monitor" keyword.
When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
will be refused.
Example :
defaults http_instances
mode http
See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>
Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
backend and its backup.
unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
servers in a list of backends.
This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode. Both status
messages may be tweaked using "errorfile" or "errorloc" if needed.
Example:
frontend www
mode http
acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
monitor-uri /site_alive
monitor fail if site_dead
See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri", "errorfile", "errorloc"
monitor-net <source>
Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
followed by a mask.
In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
forwarding the connection to a remote server.
In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
running without forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that this
response is sent in raw format, without any transformation. This is important
as it means that it will not be SSL-encrypted on SSL listeners.
Monitor requests are processed very early, just after tcp-request connection
ACLs which are the only ones able to block them. These connections are short
lived and never wait for any data from the client. They cannot be logged, and
it is the intended purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to
an upper component, nothing more. Please note that "monitor fail" rules do
not apply to connections intercepted by "monitor-net".
Last, please note that only one "monitor-net" statement can be specified in
a frontend. If more than one is found, only the last one will be considered.
Example :
# addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
frontend www
monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
monitor-uri <uri>
Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
health status instead of forwarding the request.
When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
"HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
"monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
Example :
# Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
frontend www
mode http
monitor-uri /haproxy_test
See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
option abortonclose
no option abortonclose
Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
encountered while delivering the response.
As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
still not served and not pollute the servers.
In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
"abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
reduces the response time for other users.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
option accept-invalid-http-request
no option accept-invalid-http-request
Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments : none
By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option. Similarly, the
list of characters allowed to appear in a URI is well defined by RFC3986, and
chars 0-31, 32 (space), 34 ('"'), 60 ('<'), 62 ('>'), 92 ('\'), 94 ('^'), 96
('`'), 123 ('{'), 124 ('|'), 125 ('}'), 127 (delete) and anything above are
not allowed at all. Haproxy always blocks a number of them (0..32, 127). The
remaining ones are blocked by default unless this option is enabled.
This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
been confirmed.
When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Similarly,
requests containing invalid chars in the URI part will be logged. Doing this
also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
stats socket.
option accept-invalid-http-response
no option accept-invalid-http-response
Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
been confirmed.
When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
stats socket.
option allbackups
no option allbackups
Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
order between the backup servers anymore.
This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
"sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
option checkcache
no option checkcache
Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
some sensitive session information go in the wild.
The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
to the client are :
- all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
- all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
- all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
- those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
- those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
- those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
- those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
- those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
- those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
- those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
- those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
(allowing other fields after set-cookie)
If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
option clitcpka
no option clitcpka
Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments : none
When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
operating system and its tuning parameters.
It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
noticed between HAProxy and a client.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
option contstats
Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments : none
By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
option dontlog-normal
no option dontlog-normal
Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments : none
There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
logged.
It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
logging.
option dontlognull
no option dontlognull
Enable or disable logging of null connections
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments : none
In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
which typically corresponds to those probes.
It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
would not be logged.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
option forceclose
no option forceclose
Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
global session times in the logs.
When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
resources earlier than with httpclose.
This option may also be combined with "option http-pretend-keepalive", which
will disable sending of the "Connection: close" header, but will still cause
the connection to be closed once the whole response is received.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option httpclose" and "option http-pretend-keepalive"
option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ] [ if-none ]
Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
matching <network>
<name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
header name.
Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
"X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
possible that the client has already brought one.
The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
"X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
private networks or 127.0.0.1.
Alternatively, the keyword "if-none" states that the header will only be
added if it is not present. This should only be used in perfectly trusted
environment, as this might cause a security issue if headers reaching haproxy
are under the control of the end-user.
This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
both are defined. In the case of the "if-none" argument, if at least one of
the frontend or the backend does not specify it, it wants the addition to be
mandatory, so it wins.
It is important to note that by default, HAProxy works in tunnel mode and
only inspects the first request of a connection, meaning that only the first
request will have the header appended, which is certainly not what you want.
In order to fix this, ensure that any of the "httpclose", "forceclose" or
"http-server-close" options is set when using this option.
Examples :
# Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
frontend www
mode http
option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
# Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
backend www
mode http
option forwardfor header X-Client
See also : "option httpclose", "option http-server-close",
"option forceclose"
option http-no-delay
no option http-no-delay
Instruct the system to favor low interactive delays over performance in HTTP
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
In HTTP, each payload is unidirectional and has no notion of interactivity.
Any agent is expected to queue data somewhat for a reasonably low delay.
There are some very rare server-to-server applications that abuse the HTTP
protocol and expect the payload phase to be highly interactive, with many
interleaved data chunks in both directions within a single request. This is
absolutely not supported by the HTTP specification and will not work across
most proxies or servers. When such applications attempt to do this through
haproxy, it works but they will experience high delays due to the network
optimizations which favor performance by instructing the system to wait for
enough data to be available in order to only send full packets. Typical
delays are around 200 ms per round trip. Note that this only happens with
abnormal uses. Normal uses such as CONNECT requests nor WebSockets are not
affected.
When "option http-no-delay" is present in either the frontend or the backend
used by a connection, all such optimizations will be disabled in order to
make the exchanges as fast as possible. Of course this offers no guarantee on
the functionality, as it may break at any other place. But if it works via
HAProxy, it will work as fast as possible. This option should never be used
by default, and should never be used at all unless such a buggy application
is discovered. The impact of using this option is an increase of bandwidth
usage and CPU usage, which may significantly lower performance in high
latency environments.
option http-pretend-keepalive
no option http-pretend-keepalive
Define whether haproxy will announce keepalive to the server or not
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
When running with "option http-server-close" or "option forceclose", haproxy
adds a "Connection: close" header to the request forwarded to the server.
Unfortunately, when some servers see this header, they automatically refrain
from using the chunked encoding for responses of unknown length, while this
is totally unrelated. The immediate effect is that this prevents haproxy from
maintaining the client connection alive. A second effect is that a client or
a cache could receive an incomplete response without being aware of it, and
consider the response complete.
By setting "option http-pretend-keepalive", haproxy will make the server
believe it will keep the connection alive. The server will then not fall back
to the abnormal undesired above. When haproxy gets the whole response, it
will close the connection with the server just as it would do with the
"forceclose" option. That way the client gets a normal response and the
connection is correctly closed on the server side.
It is recommended not to enable this option by default, because most servers
will more efficiently close the connection themselves after the last packet,
and release its buffers slightly earlier. Also, the added packet on the
network could slightly reduce the overall peak performance. However it is
worth noting that when this option is enabled, haproxy will have slightly
less work to do. So if haproxy is the bottleneck on the whole architecture,
enabling this option might save a few CPU cycles.
This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
This option may be combined with "option httpclose", which will cause
keepalive to be announced to the server and close to be announced to the
client. This practice is discouraged though.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
option http-server-close
no option http-server-close
Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
By default, when a client communicates with a server, HAProxy will only
analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. Setting
"option http-server-close" enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server
side while keeping the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on
the client side. This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow
network) and the fastest session reuse on the server side to save server
resources, similarly to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive
capable servers to be served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they
conform to the requirements of RFC2616. Please note that some servers do not
always conform to those requirements when they see "Connection: close" in the
request. The effect will be that keep-alive will never be used. A workaround
consists in enabling "option http-pretend-keepalive".
At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
not set.
This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option forceclose", "option http-pretend-keepalive",
"option httpclose" and "1.1. The HTTP transaction model".
option http-use-proxy-header
no option http-use-proxy-header
Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments : none
While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
request along its whole life.
Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
front of an existing proxy.
This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
http-server-close".
option httpchk
option httpchk <uri>
option httpchk <method> <uri>
option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
ones.
<uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
<version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
after "\r\n" following the version string.
By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
the lack of any response.
The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
Examples :
# Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
# using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
backend https_relay
mode tcp
option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
See also : "option lb-agent-chk", "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk",
"option mysql-check", "option pgsql-check", "http-check" and
the "check", "port" and "inter" server options.
option httpclose
no option httpclose
Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
By default, when a client communicates with a server, HAProxy will only
analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. If "option
httpclose" is set, it will check if a "Connection: close" header is already
set in each direction, and will add one if missing. Each end should react to
this by actively closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus
resulting in a switch to the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header
different from "close" will also be removed.
It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
close the connection even though they reply "Connection: close". For this
reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
the client to acknowledge it.
This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option forceclose", "option http-server-close" and
"1.1. The HTTP transaction model".
option httplog [ clf ]
Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
extensible.
By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
"option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
ports.
This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
by default.
See also : section 8 about logging.
option http_proxy
no option http_proxy
Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
needed to add "option httpclose" to ensure that all requests will correctly
be analyzed.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
Example :
# this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
backend direct_forward
option httpclose
option http_proxy
See also : "option httpclose"
option independent-streams
no option independent-streams
Enable or disable independent timeout processing for both directions
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
receive data or not.
While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
socket buffers.
When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
slow lines, so use it with caution.
Note: older versions used to call this setting "option independant-streams"
with a spelling mistake. This spelling is still supported but
deprecated.
See also : "timeout client", "timeout server" and "timeout tunnel"
option lb-agent-chk
Use a TCP connection to obtain a metric of server health
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
This alters health checking behaviour by connecting making a TCP
connection and reading an ASCII string. The string should have one of
the following forms:
* An ASCII representation of an positive integer percentage.
e.g. "75%"
Values in this format will set the weight proportional to the initial
weight of a server as configured when haproxy starts.
* The string "drain".
This will cause the weight of a server to be set to 0, and thus it will
not accept any new connections other than those that are accepted via
persistence.
* The string "down", optionally followed by a description string.
Mark the server as down and log the description string as the reason.
* The string "stopped", optionally followed by a description string.
This currently has the same behaviour as down (iii).
* The string "fail", optionally followed by a description string.
This currently has the same behaviour as down (iii).
The use of an alternate check-port, used to obtain agent heath check
information described above as opposed to the port of the service, may be
useful in conjunction with this option.
option ldap-check
Use LDAPv3 health checks for server testing
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
It is possible to test that the server correctly talks LDAPv3 instead of just
testing that it accepts the TCP connection. When this option is set, an
LDAPv3 anonymous simple bind message is sent to the server, and the response
is analyzed to find an LDAPv3 bind response message.
The server is considered valid only when the LDAP response contains success
resultCode (http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4511#section-4.1.9).
Logging of bind requests is server dependent see your documentation how to
configure it.
Example :
option ldap-check
See also : "option httpchk"
option log-health-checks
no option log-health-checks
Enable or disable logging of health checks
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
of additional information is limited.
If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
option log-separate-errors
no option log-separate-errors
Change log level for non-completely successful connections
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments : none
Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
provides very important information.
Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
error logs.
See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
logging.
option logasap
no option logasap
Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments : none
By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
"Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
bytes are expected to be transferred.
Examples :
listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
mode http
option httplog
option logasap
log 192.168.2.200 local3
>>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
"GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
logging.
option mysql-check [ user <username> ]
Use MySQL health checks for server testing
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<username> This is the username which will be used when connecting to MySQL
server.
If you specify a username, the check consists of sending two MySQL packet,
one Client Authentication packet, and one QUIT packet, to correctly close
MySQL session. We then parse the MySQL Handshake Initialisation packet and/or
Error packet. It is a basic but useful test which does not produce error nor
aborted connect on the server. However, it requires adding an authorization
in the MySQL table, like this :
USE mysql;
INSERT INTO user (Host,User) values ('<ip_of_haproxy>','<username>');
FLUSH PRIVILEGES;
If you don't specify a username (it is deprecated and not recommended), the
check only consists in parsing the Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or
Error packet, we don't send anything in this mode. It was reported that it
can generate lockout if check is too frequent and/or if there is not enough
traffic. In fact, you need in this case to check MySQL "max_connect_errors"
value as if a connection is established successfully within fewer than MySQL
"max_connect_errors" attempts after a previous connection was interrupted,
the error count for the host is cleared to zero. If HAProxy's server get
blocked, the "FLUSH HOSTS" statement is the only way to unblock it.
Remember that this does not check database presence nor database consistency.
To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
The check requires MySQL >=3.22, for older version, please use TCP check.
Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
See also: "option httpchk"
option pgsql-check [ user <username> ]
Use PostgreSQL health checks for server testing
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<username> This is the username which will be used when connecting to
PostgreSQL server.
The check sends a PostgreSQL StartupMessage and waits for either
Authentication request or ErrorResponse message. It is a basic but useful
test which does not produce error nor aborted connect on the server.
This check is identical with the "mysql-check".
See also: "option httpchk"
option nolinger
no option nolinger
Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
connections.
When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
this too.
For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
for servers.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
matching <network>
<name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
header name.
Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
possible that the client has already brought one.
The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
header and requires different one.
Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
private networks or 127.0.0.1.
This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
both are defined.
It is important to note that by default, HAProxy works in tunnel mode and
only inspects the first request of a connection, meaning that only the first
request will have the header appended, which is certainly not what you want.
In order to fix this, ensure that any of the "httpclose", "forceclose" or
"http-server-close" options is set when using this option.
Examples :
# Original Destination address
frontend www
mode http
option originalto except 127.0.0.1
# Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
backend www
mode http
option originalto header X-Client-Dst
See also : "option httpclose", "option http-server-close",
"option forceclose"
option persist
no option persist
Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
redirected to another valid server.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
option redispatch
no option redispatch
Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
be able to access the service anymore.
Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
value.
This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
"redisp" keywords.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
option redis-check
Use redis health checks for server testing
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
It is possible to test that the server correctly talks REDIS protocol instead
of just testing that it accepts the TCP connection. When this option is set,
a PING redis command is sent to the server, and the response is analyzed to
find the "+PONG" response message.
Example :
option redis-check
See also : "option httpchk"
option smtpchk
option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
Use SMTP health checks for server testing
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
<domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
"HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
dead server.
This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
Example :
option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
See also : "option httpchk", "source"
option socket-stats
no option socket-stats
Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments : none
option splice-auto
no option splice-auto
Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
requires that there are enough spare pipes.
Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
keyword.
Example :
option splice-auto
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
option splice-request
no option splice-request
Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
will use kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
Example :
option splice-request
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
"nosplice" and "maxpipes"
option splice-response
no option splice-response
Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
will use kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
Example :
option splice-response
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
"nosplice" and "maxpipes"
option srvtcpka
no option srvtcpka
Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
operating system and its tuning parameters.
It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
noticed between HAProxy and a server.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
option ssl-hello-chk
Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
hello message.
All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
messages, which is appreciable.
Note that this check works even when SSL support was not built into haproxy
because it forges the SSL message. When SSL support is available, it is best
to use native SSL health checks instead of this one.
See also: "option httpchk", "check-ssl"
option tcp-smart-accept
no option tcp-smart-accept
Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments : none
When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
"option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
"default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
option tcp-smart-connect
no option tcp-smart-connect
Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
complex.
It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
option tcpka
Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
operating system and its tuning parameters.
It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
"option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
backends.
See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
option tcplog
Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments : none
By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
"option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
option transparent
no option transparent
Enable client-side transparent proxying
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
appropriate server.
Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
See also: the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
"transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
persist rdp-cookie
persist rdp-cookie(<name>)
Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
default cookie name "msts" will be used. There currently is no
valid reason to change this name.
This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
forwarded to this server.
Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
a single "listen" section.
Also, it is important to understand that the terminal server will emit this
RDP cookie only if it is configured for "token redirection mode", which means
that the "IP address redirection" option is disabled.
Example :
listen tse-farm
bind :3389
# wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
# apply RDP cookie persistence
persist rdp-cookie
# if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
# alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
balance rdp-cookie
server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request", the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL and
the rdp_cookie pattern fetch function.
rate-limit sessions <rate>
Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
(in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
listen smtp
mode tcp
bind :25
rate-limit sessions 10
server 127.0.0.1:1025
Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status is not changed
but its sockets appear as "WAITING" in the statistics if the
"socket-stats" option is enabled.
See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
redirect location <loc> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
redirect prefix <pfx> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
redirect scheme <sch> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Arguments :
<loc> With "redirect location", the exact value in <loc> is placed into
the HTTP "Location" header.
<pfx> With "redirect prefix", the "Location" header is built from the
concatenation of <pfx> and the complete URI path, including the
query string, unless the "drop-query" option is specified (see
below). As a special case, if <pfx> equals exactly "/", then
nothing is inserted before the original URI. It allows one to
redirect to the same URL (for instance, to insert a cookie).
<sch> With "redirect scheme", then the "Location" header is built by
concatenating <sch> with "://" then the first occurrence of the
"Host" header, and then the URI path, including the query string
unless the "drop-query" option is specified (see below). If no
path is found or if the path is "*", then "/" is used instead. If
no "Host" header is found, then an empty host component will be
returned, which most recent browsers interprete as redirecting to
the same host. This directive is mostly used to redirect HTTP to
HTTPS.
<code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
is desired. Only codes 301, 302, 303, 307 and 308 are supported,
with 302 used by default if no code is specified. 301 means
"Moved permanently", and a browser may cache the Location. 302
means "Moved permanently" and means that the browser should not
cache the redirection. 303 is equivalent to 302 except that the
browser will fetch the location with a GET method. 307 is just
like 302 but makes it clear that the same method must be reused.
Likewise, 308 replaces 301 if the same method must be used.
<option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
expected behaviour of a redirection :
- "drop-query"
When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
with a location-type redirect.
- "append-slash"
This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
- "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
different from a cookie with an equal sign.
- "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
that, because the browser makes the difference.
Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
acl clear dst_port 80
acl secure dst_port 8080
acl login_page url_beg /login
acl logout url_beg /logout
acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
Example: redirect all HTTP traffic to HTTPS when SSL is handled by haproxy.
redirect scheme https if !{ ssl_fc }
See section 7 about ACL usage.
redisp (deprecated)
redispatch (deprecated)
Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
be able to access the service anymore.
Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
redistribute them to a working server.
It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
value.
This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
"option redispatch" instead.
See also : "option redispatch"
reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
<cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
the last header of an HTTP request.
Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
responses.
Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
acl is-ssl dst_port 81
reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
about ACLs.
reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
"reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
ignores case.
<cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
<search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
header names are not.
It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
Example :
# allow www.* but refuse *.local
reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
section 7 about ACLs.
reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
<cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
next servers.
Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
Example :
# remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
"reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
case.
<cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
<search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
header names are not.
A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
using ACLs.
It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
Example :
# refuse *.local, then allow www.*
reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
"reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
case.
<cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
<search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
Example :
# refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
<string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
<cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
Example :
# replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
reqrep ^([^\ :]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
# replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", "tune.bufsize", section 6 about
HTTP header manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
"reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
ignores case.
<cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
<search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
not set.
The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
Examples :
# ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
# block all others.
reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
# block bad guys
acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
reqitarpit . if badguys
See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
retries <value>
Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
default value is 3.
It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
server even if a cookie references a different server.
See also : "option redispatch"
rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
<cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
the last header of an HTTP response.
Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
responses.
See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
about ACLs.
rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
ignores case.
<cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
and/or sensitive headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
client.
Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
Example :
# remove the Server header from responses
reqidel ^Server:.*
See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
ignores case.
<cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
<search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
case-sensitive.
Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
any sensitive data.
It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
Example :
# Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
and section 7 about ACLs.
rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
ignores case.
<string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
<cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
<string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
are not case-sensitive.
Example :
# replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
server <name> <address>[:[port]] [param*]
Declare a server in a backend
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
appear in logs and alerts. If "http-send-name-header" is
set, it will be added to the request header sent to the server.
<address> is the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the server. Alternatively, a
resolvable hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved
during start-up. Address "0.0.0.0" or "*" has a special meaning.
It indicates that the connection will be forwarded to the same IP
address as the one from the client connection. This is useful in
transparent proxy architectures where the client's connection is
intercepted and haproxy must forward to the original destination
address. This is more or less what the "transparent" keyword does
except that with a server it's possible to limit concurrency and
to report statistics. Optionally, an address family prefix may be
used before the address to force the family regardless of the
address format, which can be useful to specify a path to a unix
socket with no slash ('/'). Currently supported prefixes are :
- 'ipv4@' -> address is always IPv4
- 'ipv6@' -> address is always IPv6
- 'unix@' -> address is a path to a local unix socket
Any part of the address string may reference any number of
environment variables by preceding their name with a dollar
sign ('$') and optionally enclosing them with braces ('{}'),
similarly to what is done in Bourne shell.
<port> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
adding this value to the client's port.
<param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Examples :
server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
server transp ipv4@
server backup ${SRV_BACKUP}:1080 backup
server www1_dc1 ${LAN_DC1}.101:80
server www1_dc2 ${LAN_DC2}.101:80
See also: "default-server", "http-send-name-header" and section 5 about
server options
source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Set the source address for outgoing connections
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
the most appropriate address to reach its destination. Optionally
an address family prefix may be used before the address to force
the family regardless of the address format, which can be useful
to specify a path to a unix socket with no slash ('/'). Currently
supported prefixes are :
- 'ipv4@' -> address is always IPv4
- 'ipv6@' -> address is always IPv6
- 'unix@' -> address is a path to a local unix socket
Any part of the address string may reference any number of
environment variables by preceding their name with a dollar
sign ('$') and optionally enclosing them with braces ('{}'),
similarly to what is done in Bourne shell.
<port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
have to specify them on each "server" line.
<addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
with this address, while health checks will still use the address
<addr>.
<port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
The default value of zero means the system will select a free
port.
<hdr> is the name of a HTTP header in which to fetch the IP to bind to.
This is the name of a comma-separated header list which can
contain multiple IP addresses. By default, the last occurrence is
used. This is designed to work with the X-Forwarded-For header
and to automatically bind to the client's IP address as seen
by previous proxy, typically Stunnel. In order to use another
occurrence from the last one, please see the <occ> parameter
below. When the header (or occurrence) is not found, no binding
is performed so that the proxy's default IP address is used. Also
keep in mind that the header name is case insensitive, as for any
HTTP header.
<occ> is the occurrence number of a value to be used in a multi-value
header. This is to be used in conjunction with "hdr_ip(<hdr>)",
in order to specify which occurrence to use for the source IP
address. Positive values indicate a position from the first
occurrence, 1 being the first one. Negative values indicate
positions relative to the last one, -1 being the last one. This
is helpful for situations where an X-Forwarded-For header is set
at the entry point of an infrastructure and must be used several
proxy layers away. When this value is not specified, -1 is
assumed. Passing a zero here disables the feature.
<name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
Note that using this option requires root privileges.
The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
there are two methods :
- present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
of the client ranges may be used.
- present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
same session.
Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
section 5 for more information.
Examples :
backend private
# Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
source 192.168.1.200
backend transparent_ssl1
# Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
backend transparent_ssl2
# Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
# not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
backend transparent_ssl3
# Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
# is more conntrack-friendly.
source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
backend transparent_smtp
# Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
# with Tproxy version 4.
source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
backend transparent_http
# Connect to the servers using the client's IP as seen by previous
# proxy.
source 0.0.0.0 usesrc hdr_ip(x-forwarded-for,-1)
See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
"defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
Please use "timeout server" instead.
See also : "timeout server", "timeout tunnel", "timeout client" and
"clitimeout".
stats admin { if | unless } <cond>
Enable statistics admin level if/unless a condition is matched
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
This statement enables the statistics admin level if/unless a condition is
matched.
The admin level allows to enable/disable servers from the web interface. By
default, statistics page is read-only for security reasons.
Note : Consider not using this feature in multi-process mode (nbproc > 1)
unless you know what you do : memory is not shared between the
processes, which can result in random behaviours.
Currently, the POST request is limited to the buffer size minus the reserved
buffer space, which means that if the list of servers is too long, the
request won't be processed. It is recommended to alter few servers at a
time.
Example :
# statistics admin level only for localhost
backend stats_localhost
stats enable
stats admin if LOCALHOST
Example :
# statistics admin level always enabled because of the authentication
backend stats_auth
stats enable
stats auth admin:AdMiN123
stats admin if TRUE
Example :
# statistics admin level depends on the authenticated user
userlist stats-auth
group admin users admin
user admin insecure-password AdMiN123
group readonly users haproxy
user haproxy insecure-password haproxy
backend stats_auth
stats enable
acl AUTH http_auth(stats-auth)
acl AUTH_ADMIN http_auth_group(stats-auth) admin
stats http-request auth unless AUTH
stats admin if AUTH_ADMIN
See also : "stats enable", "stats auth", "stats http-request", "nbproc",
"bind-process", section 3.4 about userlists and section 7 about
ACL usage.
stats auth <user>:<passwd>
Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<user> is a user name to grant access to
<passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
that those ones should not be sensitive and not shared with any other account.
It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
report using "stats scope".
Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
unobvious parameters.
Example :
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
stats enable
stats hide-version
stats scope .
stats uri /admin?stats
stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
stats enable
stats uri /admin?stats
stats refresh 5s
See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
stats enable
Enable statistics reporting with default settings
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
- stats uri : /haproxy?stats
- stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
- stats auth : no authentication
- stats scope : no restriction
Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
unobvious parameters.
Example :
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
stats enable
stats hide-version
stats scope .
stats uri /admin?stats
stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
stats enable
stats uri /admin?stats
stats refresh 5s
See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
stats hide-version
Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
unobvious parameters.
Example :
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
stats enable
stats hide-version
stats scope .
stats uri /admin?stats
stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
stats enable
stats uri /admin?stats
stats refresh 5s
See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
stats http-request { allow | deny | auth [realm <realm>] }
[ { if | unless } <condition> ]
Access control for statistics
May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
As "http-request", these set of options allow to fine control access to
statistics. Each option may be followed by if/unless and acl.
First option with matched condition (or option without condition) is final.
For "deny" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is
performed, for "auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client
should be asked to enter a username and password.
There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per
instance.
See also : "http-request", section 3.4 about userlists and section 7
about ACL usage.
stats realm <realm>
Enable statistics and set authentication realm
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
using a backslash ('\').
This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
only related to authentication.
Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
unobvious parameters.
Example :
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
stats enable
stats hide-version
stats scope .
stats uri /admin?stats
stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
stats enable
stats uri /admin?stats
stats refresh 5s
See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
stats refresh <delay>
Enable statistics with automatic refresh
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
unobvious parameters.
Example :
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
stats enable
stats hide-version
stats scope .
stats uri /admin?stats
stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
stats enable
stats uri /admin?stats
stats refresh 5s
See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
stats scope { <name> | "." }
Enable statistics and limit access scope
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
section in which the statement appears.
When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
exists.
Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
unobvious parameters.
Example :
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
stats enable
stats hide-version
stats scope .
stats uri /admin?stats
stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
stats enable
stats uri /admin?stats
stats refresh 5s
See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
stats show-desc [ <desc> ]
Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
<desc> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
description from global section is automatically used instead.
This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
unobvious parameters. By default description is not shown.
Example :
# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
stats enable
stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
stats uri /admin?stats
stats refresh 5s
See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
global section.
stats show-legends
Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
- cap: capabilities (proxy)
- mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
- id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
- IP (socket, server)
- cookie (backend, server)
Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
unobvious parameters. Default behaviour is not to show this information.
See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
stats show-node [ <name> ]
Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments:
<name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
node name from global section is automatically used instead.
This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
provided for each customer. Default behaviour is not to show host name.
Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
unobvious parameters.
Example:
# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
stats enable
stats show-node Europe-1
stats uri /admin?stats
stats refresh 5s
See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
section.
stats uri <prefix>
Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
query string.
The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
possible to reach it in the application.
The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
an address or a port to statistics only.
Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
unobvious parameters.
Example :
# public access (limited to this backend only)
backend public_www
server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
stats enable
stats hide-version
stats scope .
stats uri /admin?stats
stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
# internal monitoring access (unlimited)
backend private_monitoring
stats enable
stats uri /admin?stats
stats refresh 5s
See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
<table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
the "stick-table" statement.
<cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
transformation rules.
The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
ACL based conditions.
There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
matches can be used as fallbacks.
The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
Note : Consider not using this feature in multi-process mode (nbproc > 1)
unless you know what you do : memory is not shared between the
processes, which can result in random behaviours.
Example :
# forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
# last 30 minutes
backend pop
mode tcp
balance roundrobin
stick store-request src
stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
server s1 192.168.1.1:110
server s2 192.168.1.1:110
backend smtp
mode tcp
balance roundrobin
stick match src table pop
server s1 192.168.1.1:25
server s2 192.168.1.1:25
See also : "stick-table", "stick on", "nbproc", "bind-process" and section 7
about ACLs and pattern extraction.
stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
"stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
for writing more maintainable configurations.
Note : Consider not using this feature in multi-process mode (nbproc > 1)
unless you know what you do : memory is not shared between the
processes, which can result in random behaviours.
Examples :
# The following form ...
stick on src table pop if !localhost
# ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
stick match src table pop if !localhost
stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
# Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
# well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
backend http
mode http
balance roundrobin
stick on src table https
cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
backend https
mode tcp
balance roundrobin
stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
stick on src
server s1 192.168.1.1:443
server s2 192.168.1.1:443
See also : "stick match", "stick store-request", "nbproc" and "bind-process".
stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
server is selected.
<table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
the "stick-table" statement.
<cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
address.
Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
another protocol or access method.
The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
the request.
Note : Consider not using this feature in multi-process mode (nbproc > 1)
unless you know what you do : memory is not shared between the
processes, which can result in random behaviours.
Example :
# forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
# last 30 minutes
backend pop
mode tcp
balance roundrobin
stick store-request src
stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
server s1 192.168.1.1:110
server s2 192.168.1.1:110
backend smtp
mode tcp
balance roundrobin
stick match src table pop
server s1 192.168.1.1:25
server s2 192.168.1.1:25
See also : "stick-table", "stick on", "nbproc", "bind-process" and section 7
about ACLs and pattern extraction.
stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] | binary [len <length>]}
size <size> [expire <expire>] [nopurge] [peers <peersect>]
[store <data_type>]*
Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
ipv6 a table declared with "type ipv6" will only store IPv6 addresses.
This form is very compact (about 60 bytes per entry) and allows
very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
instance.
string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
compared between the string in the table and the extracted
pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
to 32 characters.
binary a table declared with "type binary" will store binary blocks
of <len> bytes. If the block provided by the pattern
extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
being stored. If the block provided by the pattern extractor
is shorter than <len>, it will be padded by 0. When not
specified, the block is automatically limited to 32 bytes.
<length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
"string" type table (See type "string" above). Or the number
of bytes of the block in "binary" type table. Be careful when
changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
increase.
<size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
value directly impacts memory usage. Count approximately
50 bytes per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size
supports suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
[nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
parameter (see below).
<peersect> is the name of the peers section to use for replication. Entries
which associate keys to server IDs are kept synchronized with
the remote peers declared in this section. All entries are also
automatically learned from the local peer (old process) during a
soft restart.
NOTE : peers can't be used in multi-process mode.
<expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
if not expiration delay is specified.
<data_type> is used to store additional information in the stick-table. This
may be used by ACLs in order to control various criteria related
to the activity of the client matching the stick-table. For each
item specified here, the size of each entry will be inflated so
that the additional data can fit. Several data types may be
stored with an entry. Multiple data types may be specified after
the "store" keyword, as a comma-separated list. Alternatively,
it is possible to repeat the "store" keyword followed by one or
several data types. Except for the "server_id" type which is
automatically detected and enabled, all data types must be
explicitly declared to be stored. If an ACL references a data
type which is not stored, the ACL will simply not match. Some
data types require an argument which must be passed just after
the type between parenthesis. See below for the supported data
types and their arguments.
The data types that can be stored with an entry are the following :
- server_id : this is an integer which holds the numeric ID of the server a
request was assigned to. It is used by the "stick match", "stick store",
and "stick on" rules. It is automatically enabled when referenced.
- gpc0 : first General Purpose Counter. It is a positive 32-bit integer
integer which may be used for anything. Most of the time it will be used
to put a special tag on some entries, for instance to note that a
specific behaviour was detected and must be known for future matches.
- conn_cnt : Connection Count. It is a positive 32-bit integer which counts
the absolute number of connections received from clients which matched
this entry. It does not mean the connections were accepted, just that
they were received.
- conn_cur : Current Connections. It is a positive 32-bit integer which
stores the concurrent connection counts for the entry. It is incremented
once an incoming connection matches the entry, and decremented once the
connection leaves. That way it is possible to know at any time the exact
number of concurrent connections for an entry.
- conn_rate(<period>) : frequency counter (takes 12 bytes). It takes an
integer parameter <period> which indicates in milliseconds the length
of the period over which the average is measured. It reports the average
incoming connection rate over that period, in connections per period. The
result is an integer which can be matched using ACLs.
- sess_cnt : Session Count. It is a positive 32-bit integer which counts
the absolute number of sessions received from clients which matched this
entry. A session is a connection that was accepted by the layer 4 rules.
- sess_rate(<period>) : frequency counter (takes 12 bytes). It takes an
integer parameter <period> which indicates in milliseconds the length
of the period over which the average is measured. It reports the average
incoming session rate over that period, in sessions per period. The
result is an integer which can be matched using ACLs.
- http_req_cnt : HTTP request Count. It is a positive 32-bit integer which
counts the absolute number of HTTP requests received from clients which
matched this entry. It does not matter whether they are valid requests or
not. Note that this is different from sessions when keep-alive is used on
the client side.
- http_req_rate(<period>) : frequency counter (takes 12 bytes). It takes an
integer parameter <period> which indicates in milliseconds the length
of the period over which the average is measured. It reports the average
HTTP request rate over that period, in requests per period. The result is
an integer which can be matched using ACLs. It does not matter whether
they are valid requests or not. Note that this is different from sessions
when keep-alive is used on the client side.
- http_err_cnt : HTTP Error Count. It is a positive 32-bit integer which
counts the absolute number of HTTP requests errors induced by clients
which matched this entry. Errors are counted on invalid and truncated
requests, as well as on denied or tarpitted requests, and on failed
authentications. If the server responds with 4xx, then the request is
also counted as an error since it's an error triggered by the client
(eg: vulnerability scan).
- http_err_rate(<period>) : frequency counter (takes 12 bytes). It takes an
integer parameter <period> which indicates in milliseconds the length
of the period over which the average is measured. It reports the average
HTTP request error rate over that period, in requests per period (see
http_err_cnt above for what is accounted as an error). The result is an
integer which can be matched using ACLs.
- bytes_in_cnt : client to server byte count. It is a positive 64-bit
integer which counts the cumulated amount of bytes received from clients
which matched this entry. Headers are included in the count. This may be
used to limit abuse of upload features on photo or video servers.
- bytes_in_rate(<period>) : frequency counter (takes 12 bytes). It takes an
integer parameter <period> which indicates in milliseconds the length
of the period over which the average is measured. It reports the average
incoming bytes rate over that period, in bytes per period. It may be used
to detect users which upload too much and too fast. Warning: with large
uploads, it is possible that the amount of uploaded data will be counted
once upon termination, thus causing spikes in the average transfer speed
instead of having a smooth one. This may partially be smoothed with
"option contstats" though this is not perfect yet. Use of byte_in_cnt is
recommended for better fairness.
- bytes_out_cnt : server to client byte count. It is a positive 64-bit
integer which counts the cumulated amount of bytes sent to clients which
matched this entry. Headers are included in the count. This may be used
to limit abuse of bots sucking the whole site.
- bytes_out_rate(<period>) : frequency counter (takes 12 bytes). It takes
an integer parameter <period> which indicates in milliseconds the length
of the period over which the average is measured. It reports the average
outgoing bytes rate over that period, in bytes per period. It may be used
to detect users which download too much and too fast. Warning: with large
transfers, it is possible that the amount of transferred data will be
counted once upon termination, thus causing spikes in the average
transfer speed instead of having a smooth one. This may partially be
smoothed with "option contstats" though this is not perfect yet. Use of
byte_out_cnt is recommended for better fairness.
There is only one stick-table per proxy. At the moment of writing this doc,
it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per proxy. If this happens
to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
reference it.
It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
as an exclusive stickiness.
Last, memory requirements may be important when storing many data types.
Indeed, storing all indicators above at once in each entry requires 116 bytes
per entry, or 116 MB for a 1-million entries table. This is definitely not
something that can be ignored.
Example:
# Keep track of counters of up to 1 million IP addresses over 5 minutes
# and store a general purpose counter and the average connection rate
# computed over a sliding window of 30 seconds.
stick-table type ip size 1m expire 5m store gpc0,conn_rate(30s)
See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", section 2.2
about time format and section 7 about ACLs.
stick store-response <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
describes what elements of the response or connection will
be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
server is selected.
<table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
the "stick-table" statement.
<cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
For instance, it could be used to store the SSL session ID only
when the response is a SSL server hello.
Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-response"
statement describes a rule to decide what to extract from the response and
when to do it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further
requests to match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the
extracted part must make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further
request. Storing an ID found in a header of a response makes sense.
See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and transformation
rules.
The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-response"
statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
condition will be evaluated while parsing the response, so any criteria can
be used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
There is no limit on the number of "stick store-response" statements, but
there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
another protocol or access method.
The table will contain the real server that processed the request.
Example :
# Learn SSL session ID from both request and response and create affinity.
backend https
mode tcp
balance roundrobin
# maximum SSL session ID length is 32 bytes.
stick-table type binary len 32 size 30k expire 30m
acl clienthello req_ssl_hello_type 1
acl serverhello rep_ssl_hello_type 2
# use tcp content accepts to detects ssl client and server hello.
tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
tcp-request content accept if clienthello
# no timeout on response inspect delay by default.
tcp-response content accept if serverhello
# SSL session ID (SSLID) may be present on a client or server hello.
# Its length is coded on 1 byte at offset 43 and its value starts
# at offset 44.
# Match and learn on request if client hello.
stick on payload_lv(43,1) if clienthello
# Learn on response if server hello.
stick store-response payload_lv(43,1) if serverhello
server s1 192.168.1.1:443
server s2 192.168.1.1:443
See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
extraction.
tcp-request connection <action> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Perform an action on an incoming connection depending on a layer 4 condition
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<action> defines the action to perform if the condition applies. Valid
actions include : "accept", "reject", "track-sc1", "track-sc2".
See below for more details.
<condition> is a standard layer4-only ACL-based condition (see section 7).
Immediately after acceptance of a new incoming connection, it is possible to
evaluate some conditions to decide whether this connection must be accepted
or dropped or have its counters tracked. Those conditions cannot make use of
any data contents because the connection has not been read from yet, and the
buffers are not yet allocated. This is used to selectively and very quickly
accept or drop connections from various sources with a very low overhead. If
some contents need to be inspected in order to take the decision, the
"tcp-request content" statements must be used instead.
The "tcp-request connection" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
order. If no rule matches or if there is no rule, the default action is to
accept the incoming connection. There is no specific limit to the number of
rules which may be inserted.
Three types of actions are supported :
- accept :
accepts the connection if the condition is true (when used with "if")
or false (when used with "unless"). The first such rule executed ends
the rules evaluation.
- reject :
rejects the connection if the condition is true (when used with "if")
or false (when used with "unless"). The first such rule executed ends
the rules evaluation. Rejected connections do not even become a
session, which is why they are accounted separately for in the stats,
as "denied connections". They are not considered for the session
rate-limit and are not logged either. The reason is that these rules
should only be used to filter extremely high connection rates such as
the ones encountered during a massive DDoS attack. Under these extreme
conditions, the simple action of logging each event would make the
system collapse and would considerably lower the filtering capacity. If
logging is absolutely desired, then "tcp-request content" rules should
be used instead.
- { track-sc1 | track-sc2 } <key> [table <table>] :
enables tracking of sticky counters from current connection. These
rules do not stop evaluation and do not change default action. Two sets
of counters may be simultaneously tracked by the same connection. The
first "track-sc1" rule executed enables tracking of the counters of the
specified table as the first set. The first "track-sc2" rule executed
enables tracking of the counters of the specified table as the second
set. It is a recommended practice to use the first set of counters for
the per-frontend counters and the second set for the per-backend ones.
These actions take one or two arguments :
<key> is mandatory, and is a pattern extraction rule as described
in section 7.8. It describes what elements of the incoming
request or connection will be analysed, extracted, combined,
and used to select which table entry to update the counters.
Note that "tcp-request connection" cannot use content-based
fetches.
<table> is an optional table to be used instead of the default one,
which is the stick-table declared in the current proxy. All
the counters for the matches and updates for the key will
then be performed in that table until the session ends.
Once a "track-sc*" rule is executed, the key is looked up in the table
and if it is not found, an entry is allocated for it. Then a pointer to
that entry is kept during all the session's life, and this entry's
counters are updated as often as possible, every time the session's
counters are updated, and also systematically when the session ends.
Counters are only updated for events that happen after the tracking has
been started. For example, connection counters will not be updated when
tracking layer 7 information, since the connection event happens before
layer7 information is extracted.
If the entry tracks concurrent connection counters, one connection is
counted for as long as the entry is tracked, and the entry will not
expire during that time. Tracking counters also provides a performance
advantage over just checking the keys, because only one table lookup is
performed for all ACL checks that make use of it.
Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
the action, it is simply performed unconditionally. That can be useful for
"track-sc*" actions as well as for changing the default action to a reject.
Example: accept all connections from white-listed hosts, reject too fast
connection without counting them, and track accepted connections.
This results in connection rate being capped from abusive sources.
tcp-request connection accept if { src -f /etc/haproxy/whitelist.lst }
tcp-request connection reject if { src_conn_rate gt 10 }
tcp-request connection track-sc1 src
Example: accept all connections from white-listed hosts, count all other
connections and reject too fast ones. This results in abusive ones
being blocked as long as they don't slow down.
tcp-request connection accept if { src -f /etc/haproxy/whitelist.lst }
tcp-request connection track-sc1 src
tcp-request connection reject if { sc1_conn_rate gt 10 }
See section 7 about ACL usage.
See also : "tcp-request content", "stick-table"
tcp-request content <action> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Perform an action on a new session depending on a layer 4-7 condition
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<action> defines the action to perform if the condition applies. Valid
actions include : "accept", "reject", "track-sc1", "track-sc2".
See "tcp-request connection" above for their signification.
<condition> is a standard layer 4-7 ACL-based condition (see section 7).
A request's contents can be analysed at an early stage of request processing
called "TCP content inspection". During this stage, ACL-based rules are
evaluated every time the request contents are updated, until either an
"accept" or a "reject" rule matches, or the TCP request inspection delay
expires with no matching rule.
The first difference between these rules and "tcp-request connection" rules
is that "tcp-request content" rules can make use of contents to take a
decision. Most often, these decisions will consider a protocol recognition or
validity. The second difference is that content-based rules can be used in
both frontends and backends. In frontends, they will be evaluated upon new
connections. In backends, they will be evaluated once a session is assigned
a backend. This means that a single frontend connection may be evaluated
several times by one or multiple backends when a session gets reassigned
(for instance after a client-side HTTP keep-alive request).
Content-based rules are evaluated in their exact declaration order. If no
rule matches or if there is no rule, the default action is to accept the
contents. There is no specific limit to the number of rules which may be
inserted.
Three types of actions are supported :
- accept :
- reject :
- { track-sc1 | track-sc2 } <key> [table <table>]
They have the same meaning as their counter-parts in "tcp-request connection"
so please refer to that section for a complete description.
Also, it is worth noting that if sticky counters are tracked from a rule
defined in a backend, this tracking will automatically end when the session
releases the backend. That allows per-backend counter tracking even in case
of HTTP keep-alive requests when the backend changes. This makes a subtle
difference because tracking rules in "frontend" and "listen" section last for
all the session, as opposed to the backend rules. The difference appears when
some layer 7 information is tracked. While there is nothing mandatory about
it, it is recommended to use the track-sc1 pointer to track per-frontend
counters and track-sc2 to track per-backend counters.
Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
the action, it is simply performed unconditionally. That can be useful for
"track-sc*" actions as well as for changing the default action to a reject.
It is perfectly possible to match layer 7 contents with "tcp-request content"
rules, since HTTP-specific ACL matches are able to preliminarily parse the
contents of a buffer before extracting the required data. If the buffered
contents do not parse as a valid HTTP message, then the ACL does not match.
The parser which is involved there is exactly the same as for all other HTTP
processing, so there is no risk of parsing something differently.
Tracking layer7 information is also possible provided that the information
are present when the rule is processed. The current solution for making the
rule engine wait for such information is to set an inspect delay and to
condition its execution with an ACL relying on such information.
Example:
# Accept HTTP requests containing a Host header saying "example.com"
# and reject everything else.
acl is_host_com hdr(Host) -i example.com
tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
tcp-request content accept if is_host_com
tcp-request content reject
Example:
# reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
acl content_present req_len gt 0
tcp-request content reject if content_present
# Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
acl content_present req_len gt 0
tcp-request content accept if content_present
tcp-request content reject
Example:
# Track the last IP from X-Forwarded-For
tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
tcp-request content track-sc1 hdr(x-forwarded-for,-1) if HTTP
Example:
# track request counts per "base" (concatenation of Host+URL)
tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
tcp-request content track-sc1 base table req-rate if HTTP
Example: track per-frontend and per-backend counters, block abusers at the
frontend when the backend detects abuse.
frontend http
# Use General Purpose Couter 0 in SC1 as a global abuse counter
# protecting all our sites
stick-table type ip size 1m expire 5m store gpc0
tcp-request connection track-sc1 src
tcp-request connection reject if { sc1_get_gpc0 gt 0 }
...
use_backend http_dynamic if { path_end .php }
backend http_dynamic
# if a source makes too fast requests to this dynamic site (tracked
# by SC2), block it globally in the frontend.
stick-table type ip size 1m expire 5m store http_req_rate(10s)
acl click_too_fast sc2_http_req_rate gt 10
acl mark_as_abuser sc1_inc_gpc0 gt 0
tcp-request content track-sc2 src
tcp-request content reject if click_too_fast mark_as_abuser
See section 7 about ACL usage.
See also : "tcp-request connection", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
data for at most the specified amount of time.
TCP content inspection applies very early when a connection reaches a
frontend, then very early when the connection is forwarded to a backend. This
means that a connection may experience a first delay in the frontend and a
second delay in the backend if both have tcp-request rules.
Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
setups are not recommended.
As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
it pass through unaffected.
For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first. If the client
closes the connection or if the buffer is full, the delay immediately expires
since the contents will not be able to change anymore.
See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
"timeout client".
tcp-response content <action> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Perform an action on a session response depending on a layer 4-7 condition
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<action> defines the action to perform if the condition applies. Valid
actions include : "accept", "reject".
See "tcp-request connection" above for their signification.
<condition> is a standard layer 4-7 ACL-based condition (see section 7).
Response contents can be analysed at an early stage of response processing
called "TCP content inspection". During this stage, ACL-based rules are
evaluated every time the response contents are updated, until either an
"accept" or a "reject" rule matches, or a TCP response inspection delay is
set and expires with no matching rule.
Most often, these decisions will consider a protocol recognition or validity.
Content-based rules are evaluated in their exact declaration order. If no
rule matches or if there is no rule, the default action is to accept the
contents. There is no specific limit to the number of rules which may be
inserted.
Two types of actions are supported :
- accept :
accepts the response if the condition is true (when used with "if")
or false (when used with "unless"). The first such rule executed ends
the rules evaluation.
- reject :
rejects the response if the condition is true (when used with "if")
or false (when used with "unless"). The first such rule executed ends
the rules evaluation. Rejected session are immediately closed.
Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
the action, it is simply performed unconditionally. That can be useful for
for changing the default action to a reject.
It is perfectly possible to match layer 7 contents with "tcp-response
content" rules, but then it is important to ensure that a full response has
been buffered, otherwise no contents will match. In order to achieve this,
the best solution involves detecting the HTTP protocol during the inspection
period.
See section 7 about ACL usage.
See also : "tcp-request content", "tcp-response inspect-delay"
tcp-response inspect-delay <timeout>
Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a response during content inspection
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
See also : "tcp-response content", "tcp-request inspect-delay".
timeout check <timeout>
Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
established.
May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments:
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
(Please also note that there is no valid reason to have such long connect
timeouts, because "timeout queue" and "timeout tarpit" can always be used to
avoid that).
If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
be smaller than "timeout server".
This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
"defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
forget about it.
See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
"timeout tarpit".
timeout client <timeout>
timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
(and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
(eg: 4 or 5 seconds). If some long-lived sessions are mixed with short-lived
sessions (eg: WebSocket and HTTP), it's worth considering "timeout tunnel",
which overrides "timeout client" and "timeout server" for tunnels.
This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
"defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server", "timeout tunnel".
timeout connect <timeout>
timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
if these have not been specified.
This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
"defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
"timeout tarpit".
timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
once the request has started to present itself.
The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
with tens to hundreds of thousands of clients.
If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
timeout http-request <timeout>
Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
timeout will be used.
See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
timeout queue <timeout>
Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
timeout server <timeout>
timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum). If some long-lived sessions are mixed
with short-lived sessions (eg: WebSocket and HTTP), it's worth considering
"timeout tunnel", which overrides "timeout client" and "timeout server" for
tunnels.
This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
"defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client" and "timeout tunnel".
timeout tarpit <timeout>
Set the duration for which tarpitted connections will be maintained
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | yes
Arguments :
<timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
defines how long it will be maintained open.
The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
with no "timeout tarpit" parameter.
See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
timeout tunnel <timeout>
Set the maximum inactivity time on the client and server side for tunnels.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
as explained at the top of this document.
The tunnel timeout applies when a bidirectional connection is established
between a client and a server, and the connection remains inactive in both
directions. This timeout supersedes both the client and server timeouts once
the connection becomes a tunnel. In TCP, this timeout is used as soon as no
analyser remains attached to either connection (eg: tcp content rules are
accepted). In HTTP, this timeout is used when a connection is upgraded (eg:
when switching to the WebSocket protocol, or forwarding a CONNECT request
to a proxy), or after the first response when no keepalive/close option is
specified.
The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
document. Whatever the expected normal idle time, it is a good practice to
cover at least one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that
are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
"defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
forget about it.
Example :
defaults http
option http-server-close
timeout connect 5s
timeout client 30s
timeout client 30s
timeout server 30s
timeout tunnel 1h # timeout to use with WebSocket and CONNECT
See also : "timeout client", "timeout server".
transparent (deprecated)
Enable client-side transparent proxying
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | no | yes | yes
Arguments : none
This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
appropriate server.
The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
See also: "option transparent"
unique-id-format <string>
Generate a unique ID for each request.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<string> is a log-format string.
This keyword creates a ID for each request using the custom log format. A
unique ID is useful to trace a request passing through many components of
a complex infrastructure. The newly created ID may also be logged using the
%ID tag the log-format string.
The format should be composed from elements that are guaranteed to be
unique when combined together. For instance, if multiple haproxy instances
are involved, it might be important to include the node name. It is often
needed to log the incoming connection's source and destination addresses
and ports. Note that since multiple requests may be performed over the same
connection, including a request counter may help differentiate them.
Similarly, a timestamp may protect against a rollover of the counter.
Logging the process ID will avoid collisions after a service restart.
It is recommended to use hexadecimal notation for many fields since it
makes them more compact and saves space in logs.
Example:
unique-id-format %{+X}o\ %Ci:%Cp_%Fi:%Fp_%Ts_%rt:%pid
will generate:
7F000001:8296_7F00001E:1F90_4F7B0A69_0003:790A
See also: "unique-id-header"
unique-id-header <name>
Add a unique ID header in the HTTP request.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
yes | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<name> is the name of the header.
Add a unique-id header in the HTTP request sent to the server, using the
unique-id-format. It can't work if the unique-id-format doesn't exist.
Example:
unique-id-format %{+X}o\ %Ci:%Cp_%Fi:%Fp_%Ts_%rt:%pid
unique-id-header X-Unique-ID
will generate:
X-Unique-ID: 7F000001:8296_7F00001E:1F90_4F7B0A69_0003:790A
See also: "unique-id-format"
use_backend <backend> if <condition>
use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | yes | yes | no
Arguments :
<backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
<condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
"use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
some payload.
There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
assign the backend.
In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
use-server <server> if <condition>
use-server <server> unless <condition>
Only use a specific server if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
no | no | yes | yes
Arguments :
<server> is the name of a valid server in the same backend section.
<condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
By default, connections which arrive to a backend are load-balanced across
the available servers according to the configured algorithm, unless a
persistence mechanism such as a cookie is used and found in the request.
Sometimes it is desirable to forward a particular request to a specific
server without having to declare a dedicated backend for this server. This
can be achieved using the "use-server" rules. These rules are evaluated after
the "redirect" rules and before evaluating cookies, and they have precedence
on them. There may be as many "use-server" rules as desired. All of these
rules are evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which
matches will assign the server.
If a rule designates a server which is down, and "option persist" is not used
and no force-persist rule was validated, it is ignored and evaluation goes on
with the next rules until one matches.
In the first form, the server will be used if the condition is met. In the
second form, the server will be used if the condition is not met. If no
condition is valid, the processing continues and the server will be assigned
according to other persistence mechanisms.
Note that even if a rule is matched, cookie processing is still performed but
does not assign the server. This allows prefixed cookies to have their prefix
stripped.
The "use-server" statement works both in HTTP and TCP mode. This makes it
suitable for use with content-based inspection. For instance, a server could
be selected in a farm according to the TLS SNI field. And if these servers
have their weight set to zero, they will not be used for other traffic.
Example :
# intercept incoming TLS requests based on the SNI field
use-server www if { req_ssl_sni -i www.example.com }
server www 192.168.0.1:443 weight 0
use-server mail if { req_ssl_sni -i mail.example.com }
server mail 192.168.0.1:587 weight 0
use-server imap if { req_ssl_sni -i imap.example.com }
server mail 192.168.0.1:993 weight 0
# all the rest is forwarded to this server
server default 192.168.0.2:443 check
See also: "use_backend", serction 5 about server and section 7 about ACLs.
5. Bind and Server options
--------------------------
The "bind", "server" and "default-server" keywords support a number of settings
depending on some build options and on the system HAProxy was built on. These
settings generally each consist in one word sometimes followed by a value,
written on the same line as the "bind" or "server" line. All these options are
described in this section.
5.1. Bind options
-----------------
The "bind" keyword supports a certain number of settings which are all passed
as arguments on the same line. The order in which those arguments appear makes
no importance, provided that they appear after the bind address. All of these
parameters are optional. Some of them consist in a single words (booleans),
while other ones expect a value after them. In this case, the value must be
provided immediately after the setting name.
The currently supported settings are the following ones.
accept-proxy
Enforces the use of the PROXY protocol over any connection accepted by any of
the sockets declared on the same line. The PROXY protocol dictates the layer
3/4 addresses of the incoming connection to be used everywhere an address is
used, with the only exception of "tcp-request connection" rules which will
only see the real connection address. Logs will reflect the addresses
indicated in the protocol, unless it is violated, in which case the real
address will still be used. This keyword combined with support from external
components can be used as an efficient and reliable alternative to the
X-Forwarded-For mechanism which is not always reliable and not even always
usable.
backlog <backlog>
Sets the socket's backlog to this value. If unspecified, the frontend's
backlog is used instead, which generally defaults to the maxconn value.
ecdhe <named curve>
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It sets
the named curve (RFC 4492) used to generate ECDH ephemeral keys. By default,
used named curve is prime256v1.
ca-file <cafile>
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
designates a PEM file from which to load CA certificates used to verify
client's certificate.
ca-ignore-err [all|<errorID>,...]
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in.
Sets a comma separated list of errorIDs to ignore during verify at depth > 0.
If set to 'all', all errors are ignored. SSL handshake is not aborted if an
error is ignored.
ciphers <ciphers>
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It sets
the string describing the list of cipher algorithms ("cipher suite") that are
negociated during the SSL/TLS handshake. The format of the string is defined
in "man 1 ciphers" from OpenSSL man pages, and can be for instance a string
such as "AES:ALL:!aNULL:!eNULL:+RC4:@STRENGTH" (without quotes).
crl-file <crlfile>
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
designates a PEM file from which to load certificate revocation list used
to verify client's certificate.
crt <cert>
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
designates a PEM file containing both the required certificates and any
associated private keys. This file can be built by concatenating multiple
PEM files into one (e.g. cat cert.pem key.pem > combined.pem). If your CA
requires an intermediate certificate, this can also be concatenated into this
file.
If the OpenSSL used supports Diffie-Hellman, parameters present in this file
are loaded.
If a directory name is used instead of a PEM file, then all files found in
that directory will be loaded. This directive may be specified multiple times
in order to load certificates from multiple files or directories. The
certificates will be presented to clients who provide a valid TLS Server Name
Indication field matching one of their CN or alt subjects. Wildcards are
supported, where a wildcard character '*' is used instead of the first
hostname component (eg: *.example.org matches www.example.org but not
www.sub.example.org).
If no SNI is provided by the client or if the SSL library does not support
TLS extensions, or if the client provides an SNI hostname which does not
match any certificate, then the first loaded certificate will be presented.
This means that when loading certificates from a directory, it is highly
recommended to load the default one first as a file.
Note that the same cert may be loaded multiple times without side effects.
Some CAs (such as Godaddy) offer a drop down list of server types that do not
include HAProxy when obtaining a certificate. If this happens be sure to
choose a webserver that the CA believes requires a intermediate CA (for
Godaddy, selection Apache Tomcat will get the correct bundle, but many
others, e.g. nginx, result in a wrong bundle that will not work for some
clients).
crt-ignore-err <errors>
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. Sets a
comma separated list of errorIDs to ignore during verify at depth == 0. If
set to 'all', all errors are ignored. SSL handshake is not abored if an error
is ignored.
crt-list <file>
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
designates a list of PEM file with an optional SNI filter per certificate,
with the following format for each line :
<crtfile> [<snifilter>]
Wildcards are supported in the SNI filter. The certificates will be presented
to clients who provide a valid TLS Server Name Indication field matching one
of SNI filter. If no SNI filter is specified the CN and alt subjects are
used. This directive may be specified multiple times. See the "crt" option
for more information. The default certificate is still needed to meet OpenSSL
expectations. If it is not used, the strict-sni option may be used.
defer-accept
Is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain Linux kernels. It
states that a connection will only be accepted once some data arrive on it,
or at worst after the first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols
for which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly improve
performance by ensuring that most of the request is already available when
the connection is accepted. On the other hand, it will not be able to detect
connections which don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is never accepted until
the client talks. This can cause issues with front firewalls which would see
an established connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV. This
option is only supported on TCPv4/TCPv6 sockets and ignored by other ones.
force-sslv3
This option enforces use of SSLv3 only on SSL connections instanciated from
this listener. SSLv3 is generally less expensive than the TLS counterparts
for high connection rates. See also "force-tls*", "no-sslv3", and "no-tls*".
force-tlsv10
This option enforces use of TLSv1.0 only on SSL connections instanciated from
this listener. See also "force-tls*", "no-sslv3", and "no-tls*".
force-tlsv11
This option enforces use of TLSv1.1 only on SSL connections instanciated from
this listener. See also "force-tls*", "no-sslv3", and "no-tls*".
force-tlsv12
This option enforces use of TLSv1.2 only on SSL connections instanciated from
this listener. See also "force-tls*", "no-sslv3", and "no-tls*".
gid <gid>
Sets the group of the UNIX sockets to the designated system gid. It can also
be set by default in the global section's "unix-bind" statement. Note that
some platforms simply ignore this. This setting is equivalent to the "group"
setting except that the group ID is used instead of its name. This setting is
ignored by non UNIX sockets.
group <group>
Sets the group of the UNIX sockets to the designated system group. It can
also be set by default in the global section's "unix-bind" statement. Note
that some platforms simply ignore this. This setting is equivalent to the
"gid" setting except that the group name is used instead of its gid. This
setting is ignored by non UNIX sockets.
id <id>
Fixes the socket ID. By default, socket IDs are automatically assigned, but
sometimes it is more convenient to fix them to ease monitoring. This value
must be strictly positive and unique within the listener/frontend. This
option can only be used when defining only a single socket.
interface <interface>
Restricts the socket to a specific interface. When specified, only packets
received from that particular interface are processed by the socket. This is
currently only supported on Linux. The interface must be a primary system
interface, not an aliased interface. It is also possible to bind multiple
frontends to the same address if they are bound to different interfaces. Note
that binding to a network interface requires root privileges. This parameter
is only compatible with TCPv4/TCPv6 sockets.
level <level>
This setting is used with the stats sockets only to restrict the nature of
the commands that can be issued on the socket. It is ignored by other
sockets. <level> can be one of :
- "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
- "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
be read, and only non-sensitive changes are permitted (eg: clear max
counters).
- "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
all counters).
maxconn <maxconn>
Limits the sockets to this number of concurrent connections. Extraneous
connections will remain in the system's backlog until a connection is
released. If unspecified, the limit will be the same as the frontend's
maxconn. Note that in case of port ranges or multiple addresses, the same
value will be applied to each socket. This setting enables different
limitations on expensive sockets, for instance SSL entries which may easily
eat all memory.
mode <mode>
Sets the octal mode used to define access permissions on the UNIX socket. It
can also be set by default in the global section's "unix-bind" statement.
Note that some platforms simply ignore this. This setting is ignored by non
UNIX sockets.
mss <maxseg>
Sets the TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be advertised on incoming
connections. This can be used to force a lower MSS for certain specific
ports, for instance for connections passing through a VPN. Note that this
relies on a kernel feature which is theoretically supported under Linux but
was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not work on other
operating systems. It may also not change the advertised value but change the
effective size of outgoing segments. The commonly advertised value for TCPv4
over Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP). If this value is
positive, it will be used as the advertised MSS. If it is negative, it will
indicate by how much to reduce the incoming connection's advertised MSS for
outgoing segments. This parameter is only compatible with TCP v4/v6 sockets.
name <name>
Sets an optional name for these sockets, which will be reported on the stats
page.
nice <nice>
Sets the 'niceness' of connections initiated from the socket. Value must be
in the range -1024..1024 inclusive, and defaults to zero. Positive values
means that such connections are more friendly to others and easily offer
their place in the scheduler. On the opposite, negative values mean that
connections want to run with a higher priority than others. The difference
only happens under high loads when the system is close to saturation.
Negative values are appropriate for low-latency or administration services,
and high values are generally recommended for CPU intensive tasks such as SSL
processing or bulk transfers which are less sensible to latency. For example,
it may make sense to use a positive value for an SMTP socket and a negative
one for an RDP socket.
no-sslv3
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
disables support for SSLv3 on any sockets instanciated from the listener when
SSL is supported. Note that SSLv2 is forced disabled in the code and cannot
be enabled using any configuration option. See also "force-tls*",
and "force-sslv3".
no-tls-tickets
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
disables the stateless session resumption (RFC 5077 TLS Ticket
extension) and force to use stateful session resumption. Stateless
session resumption is more expensive in CPU usage.
no-tlsv10
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
disables support for TLSv1.0 on any sockets instanciated from the listener
when SSL is supported. Note that SSLv2 is forced disabled in the code and
cannot be enabled using any configuration option. See also "force-tls*",
and "force-sslv3".
no-tlsv11
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
disables support for TLSv1.1 on any sockets instanciated from the listener
when SSL is supported. Note that SSLv2 is forced disabled in the code and
cannot be enabled using any configuration option. See also "force-tls*",
and "force-sslv3".
no-tlsv12
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
disables support for TLSv1.2 on any sockets instanciated from the listener
when SSL is supported. Note that SSLv2 is forced disabled in the code and
cannot be enabled using any configuration option. See also "force-tls*",
and "force-sslv3".
npn <protocols>
This enables the NPN TLS extension and advertises the specified protocol list
as supported on top of NPN. The protocol list consists in a comma-delimited
list of protocol names, for instance: "http/1.1,http/1.0" (without quotes).
This requires that the SSL library is build with support for TLS extensions
enabled (check with haproxy -vv).
ssl
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
enables SSL deciphering on connections instanciated from this listener. A
certificate is necessary (see "crt" above). All contents in the buffers will
appear in clear text, so that ACLs and HTTP processing will only have access
to deciphered contents.
strict-sni
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. The
SSL/TLS negotiation is allow only if the client provided an SNI which match
a certificate. The default certificate is not used.
See the "crt" option for more information.
tfo
Is an optional keyword which is supported only on Linux kernels >= 3.7. It
enables TCP Fast Open on the listening socket, which means that clients which
support this feature will be able to send a request and receive a response
during the 3-way handshake starting from second connection, thus saving one
round-trip after the first connection. This only makes sense with protocols
that use high connection rates and where each round trip matters. This can
possibly cause issues with many firewalls which do not accept data on SYN
packets, so this option should only be enabled once well tested. This option
is only supported on TCPv4/TCPv6 sockets and ignored by other ones. You may
need to build HAProxy with USE_TFO=1 if your libc doesn't define
TCP_FASTOPEN.
transparent
Is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain Linux kernels. It
indicates that the addresses will be bound even if they do not belong to the
local machine, and that packets targeting any of these addresses will be
intercepted just as if the addresses were locally configured. This normally
requires that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with the
default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for the specified port.
This keyword is available only when HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
This parameter is only compatible with TCPv4 and TCPv6 sockets, depending on
kernel version. Some distribution kernels include backports of the feature,
so check for support with your vendor.
v4v6
Is an optional keyword which is supported only on most recent systems
including Linux kernels >= 2.4.21. It is used to bind a socket to both IPv4
and IPv6 when it uses the default address. Doing so is sometimes necessary
on systems which bind to IPv6 only by default. It has no effect on non-IPv6
sockets, and is overriden by the "v6only" option.
v6only
Is an optional keyword which is supported only on most recent systems
including Linux kernels >= 2.4.21. It is used to bind a socket to IPv6 only
when it uses the default address. Doing so is sometimes preferred to doing it
system-wide as it is per-listener. It has no effect on non-IPv6 sockets and
has precedence over the "v4v6" option.
uid <uid>
Sets the owner of the UNIX sockets to the designated system uid. It can also
be set by default in the global section's "unix-bind" statement. Note that
some platforms simply ignore this. This setting is equivalent to the "user"
setting except that the user numeric ID is used instead of its name. This
setting is ignored by non UNIX sockets.
user <user>
Sets the owner of the UNIX sockets to the designated system user. It can also
be set by default in the global section's "unix-bind" statement. Note that
some platforms simply ignore this. This setting is equivalent to the "uid"
setting except that the user name is used instead of its uid. This setting is
ignored by non UNIX sockets.
verify [none|optional|required]
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. If set
to 'none', client certificate is not requested. This is the default. In other
cases, a client certificate is requested. If the client does not provide a
certificate after the request and if 'verify' is set to 'required', then the
handshake is aborted, while it would have succeeded if set to 'optional'. The
certificate provided by the client is always verified using CAs from
'ca-file' and optional CRLs from 'crl-file'. On verify failure the handshake
is aborted, regardless of the 'verify' option, unless the error code exactly
matches one of those listed with 'ca-ignore-err' or 'crt-ignore-err'.
5.2. Server and default-server options
------------------------------------
The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
address if they are used:
server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
default-server [settings ...]
The currently supported settings are the following ones.
addr <ipv4|ipv6>
Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Supported in default-server: No
backup
When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
option.
Supported in default-server: No
ca-file <cafile>
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
designates a PEM file from which to load CA certificates used to verify
server's certificate.
Supported in default-server: No
check
This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
always considered available. If "check" is set, the server is available when
accepting periodic TCP connections, to ensure that it is really able to serve
requests. The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the
server, and the default source is the same as the one defined in the
backend. It is possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the
port using the "port" parameter, the source address using the "source"
address, and the interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall"
parameters. The request method is define in the backend using the
"httpchk", "lb-agent-chk", "smtpchk", "mysql-check", "pgsql-check" and
"ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and parameters for
more information.
Supported in default-server: No
check-send-proxy
This option forces emission of a PROXY protocol line with outgoing health
checks, regardless of whether the server uses send-proxy or not for the
normal traffic. By default, the PROXY protocol is enabled for health checks
if it is already enabled for normal traffic and if no "port" nor "addr"
directive is present. However, if such a directive is present, the
"check-send-proxy" option needs to be used to force the use of the
protocol. See also the "send-proxy" option for more information.
Supported in default-server: No
check-ssl
This option forces encryption of all health checks over SSL, regardless of
whether the server uses SSL or not for the normal traffic. This is generally
used when an explicit "port" or "addr" directive is specified and SSL health
checks are not inherited. It is important to understand that this option
inserts an SSL transport layer below the ckecks, so that a simple TCP connect
check becomes an SSL connect, which replaces the old ssl-hello-chk. The most
common use is to send HTTPS checks by combining "httpchk" with SSL checks.
All SSL settings are common to health checks and traffic (eg: ciphers).
See the "ssl" option for more information.
Supported in default-server: No
ciphers <ciphers>
This option sets the string describing the list of cipher algorithms that is
is negociated during the SSL/TLS handshake with the server. The format of the
string is defined in "man 1 ciphers". When SSL is used to communicate with
servers on the local network, it is common to see a weaker set of algorithms
than what is used over the internet. Doing so reduces CPU usage on both the
server and haproxy while still keeping it compatible with deployed software.
Some algorithms such as RC4-SHA1 are reasonably cheap. If no security at all
is needed and just connectivity, using DES can be appropriate.
Supported in default-server: No
cookie <value>
The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
<value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
Supported in default-server: No
crl-file <crlfile>
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
designates a PEM file from which to load certificate revocation list used
to verify server's certificate.
Supported in default-server: No
crt <cert>
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in.
It designates a PEM file from which to load both a certificate and the
associated private key. This file can be built by concatenating both PEM
files into one. This certificate will be sent if the server send a client
certificate request.
Supported in default-server: No
disabled
The "disabled" keyword starts the server in the "disabled" state. That means
that it is marked down in maintenance mode, and no connection other than the
ones allowed by persist mode will reach it. It is very well suited to setup
new servers, because normal traffic will never reach them, while it is still
possible to test the service by making use of the force-persist mechanism.
Supported in default-server: No
error-limit <count>
If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Supported in default-server: Yes
See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
fall <count>
The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
<count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
Supported in default-server: Yes
force-sslv3
This option enforces use of SSLv3 only when SSL is used to communicate with
the server. SSLv3 is generally less expensive than the TLS counterparts for
high connection rates. See also "no-tlsv*", "no-sslv3".
Supported in default-server: No
force-tlsv10
This option enforces use of TLSv1.0 only when SSL is used to communicate with
the server. See also "no-tlsv*", "no-sslv3".
Supported in default-server: No
force-tlsv11
This option enforces use of TLSv1.1 only when SSL is used to communicate with
the server. See also "no-tlsv*", "no-sslv3".
Supported in default-server: No
force-tlsv12
This option enforces use of TLSv1.2 only when SSL is used to communicate with
the server. See also "no-tlsv*", "no-sslv3".
Supported in default-server: No
id <value>
Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Supported in default-server: No
inter <delay>
fastinter <delay>
downinter <delay>
The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
between checks depending on the server state :
Server state | Interval used
---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Transitionally UP (going down), |
Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
or yet unchecked. |
---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
servers.
Supported in default-server: Yes
maxconn <maxconn>
The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
Supported in default-server: Yes
maxqueue <maxqueue>
The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
"maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
Supported in default-server: Yes
minconn <minconn>
When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
<minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Supported in default-server: Yes
no-sslv3
This option disables support for SSLv3 when SSL is used to communicate with
the server. Note that SSLv2 is disabled in the code and cannot be enabled
using any configuration option. See also "force-sslv3", "force-tlsv*".
Supported in default-server: No
no-tls-tickets
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. It
disables the stateless session resumption (RFC 5077 TLS Ticket
extension) and force to use stateful session resumption. Stateless
session resumption is more expensive in CPU usage for servers.
Supported in default-server: No
no-tlsv10
This option disables support for TLSv1.0 when SSL is used to communicate with
the server. Note that SSLv2 is disabled in the code and cannot be enabled
using any configuration option. TLSv1 is more expensive than SSLv3 so it
often makes sense to disable it when communicating with local servers. See
also "force-sslv3", "force-tlsv*".
Supported in default-server: No
no-tlsv11
This option disables support for TLSv1.1 when SSL is used to communicate with
the server. Note that SSLv2 is disabled in the code and cannot be enabled
using any configuration option. TLSv1 is more expensive than SSLv3 so it
often makes sense to disable it when communicating with local servers. See
also "force-sslv3", "force-tlsv*".
Supported in default-server: No
no-tlsv12
This option disables support for TLSv1.2 when SSL is used to communicate with
the server. Note that SSLv2 is disabled in the code and cannot be enabled
using any configuration option. TLSv1 is more expensive than SSLv3 so it
often makes sense to disable it when communicating with local servers. See
also "force-sslv3", "force-tlsv*".
Supported in default-server: No
non-stick
Never add connections allocated to this sever to a stick-table.
This may be used in conjunction with backup to ensure that
stick-table persistence is disabled for backup servers.
Supported in default-server: No
observe <mode>
This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
"layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
headers, a timeout, etc. Valid status codes include 100 to 499, 501 and 505.
Supported in default-server: No
See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
on-error <mode>
Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
Currently, four modes are available:
- fastinter: force fastinter
- fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
- sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
- mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
Supported in default-server: Yes
See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
on-marked-down <action>
Modify what occurs when a server is marked down.
Currently one action is available:
- shutdown-sessions: Shutdown peer sessions. When this setting is enabled,
all connections to the server are immediately terminated when the server
goes down. It might be used if the health check detects more complex cases
than a simple connection status, and long timeouts would cause the service
to remain unresponsive for too long a time. For instance, a health check
might detect that a database is stuck and that there's no chance to reuse
existing connections anymore. Connections killed this way are logged with
a 'D' termination code (for "Down").
Actions are disabled by default
Supported in default-server: Yes
on-marked-up <action>
Modify what occurs when a server is marked up.
Currently one action is available:
- shutdown-backup-sessions: Shutdown sessions on all backup servers. This is
done only if the server is not in backup state and if it is not disabled
(it must have an effective weight > 0). This can be used sometimes to force
an active server to take all the traffic back after recovery when dealing
with long sessions (eg: LDAP, SQL, ...). Doing this can cause more trouble
than it tries to solve (eg: incomplete transactions), so use this feature
with extreme care. Sessions killed because a server comes up are logged
with an 'U' termination code (for "Up").
Actions are disabled by default
Supported in default-server: Yes
port <port>
Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
set. See also the "addr" parameter.
Supported in default-server: Yes
redir <prefix>
The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
loop between the client and HAProxy!
Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
Supported in default-server: No
rise <count>
The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
Supported in default-server: Yes
send-proxy
The "send-proxy" parameter enforces use of the PROXY protocol over any
connection established to this server. The PROXY protocol informs the other
end about the layer 3/4 addresses of the incoming connection, so that it can
know the client's address or the public address it accessed to, whatever the
upper layer protocol. For connections accepted by an "accept-proxy" listener,
the advertised address will be used. Only TCPv4 and TCPv6 address families
are supported. Other families such as Unix sockets, will report an UNKNOWN
family. Servers using this option can fully be chained to another instance of
haproxy listening with an "accept-proxy" setting. This setting must not be
used if the server isn't aware of the protocol. When health checks are sent
to the server, the PROXY protocol is automatically used when this option is
set, unless there is an explicit "port" or "addr" directive, in which case an
explicit "check-send-proxy" directive would also be needed to use the PROXY
protocol. See also the "accept-proxy" option of the "bind" keyword.
Supported in default-server: No
slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
parameters :
- maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
- weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
seen as failed.
Supported in default-server: Yes
source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
server.
Supported in default-server: No
ssl
This option enables SSL ciphering on outgoing connections to the server. At
the moment, server certificates are not checked, so this is prone to man in
the middle attacks. The real intended use is to permit SSL communication
with software which cannot work in other modes over networks that would
otherwise be considered safe enough for clear text communications. When this
option is used, health checks are automatically sent in SSL too unless there
is a "port" or an "addr" directive indicating the check should be sent to a
different location. See the "check-ssl" optino to force SSL health checks.
Supported in default-server: No
track [<proxy>/]<server>
This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
Supported in default-server: No
verify [none|required]
This setting is only available when support for OpenSSL was built in. If set
to 'none', server certificate is not verified. This is the default. In the
other case, The certificate provided by the server is verified using CAs from
'ca-file' and optional CRLs from 'crl-file'. On verify failure the handshake
is aborted.
Supported in default-server: No
weight <weight>
The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
room above and below for later adjustments.
Supported in default-server: Yes
6. HTTP header manipulation
---------------------------
In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
in section 4.2 :
- reqadd <string>
- reqallow <search>
- reqiallow <search>
- reqdel <search>
- reqidel <search>
- reqdeny <search>
- reqideny <search>
- reqpass <search>
- reqipass <search>
- reqrep <search> <replace>
- reqirep <search> <replace>
- reqtarpit <search>
- reqitarpit <search>
- rspadd <string>
- rspdel <search>
- rspidel <search>
- rspdeny <search>
- rspideny <search>
- rsprep <search> <replace>
- rspirep <search> <replace>
With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
\t for a tab
\r for a carriage return (CR)
\n for a new line (LF)
\ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
\# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
\\ to use a backslash in a regex
\\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
\xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
9 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
is very common to users of the "sed" program.
The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
Notes related to these keywords :
---------------------------------
- these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
- lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
- the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
- for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
useless headers before adding new ones.
- keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
- when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
- req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
before switching.
7. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
------------------------------------
The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
simple :
- define test criteria with sets of values
- perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
The following ACL flags are currently supported :
-i : ignore case during matching of all subsequent patterns.
-f : load patterns from a file.
-- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
The "-f" flag is special as it loads all of the lines it finds in the file
specified in argument and loads all of them before continuing. It is even
possible to pass multiple "-f" arguments if the patterns are to be loaded from
multiple files. Empty lines as well as lines beginning with a sharp ('#') will
be ignored. All leading spaces and tabs will be stripped. If it is absolutely
needed to insert a valid pattern beginning with a sharp, just prefix it with a
space so that it is not taken for a comment. Depending on the data type and
match method, haproxy may load the lines into a binary tree, allowing very fast
lookups. This is true for IPv4 and exact string matching. In this case,
duplicates will automatically be removed. Also, note that the "-i" flag applies
to subsequent entries and not to entries loaded from files preceding it. For
instance :
acl valid-ua hdr(user-agent) -f exact-ua.lst -i -f generic-ua.lst test
In this example, each line of "exact-ua.lst" will be exactly matched against
the "user-agent" header of the request. Then each line of "generic-ua" will be
case-insensitively matched. Then the word "test" will be insensitively matched
too.
Note that right now it is difficult for the ACL parsers to report errors, so if
a file is unreadable or unparsable, the most you'll get is a parse error in the
ACL. Thus, file-based ACLs should only be produced by reliable processes.
Supported types of values are :
- integers or integer ranges
- strings
- regular expressions
- IP addresses and networks
7.1. Matching integers
----------------------
Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
may be omitted.
For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
ranges and operators.
For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
of values.
Available operators for integer matching are :
eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
7.2. Matching strings
---------------------
String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
7.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
-------------------------------------------
Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
match the string "--".
7.4. Matching IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
----------------------------
IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
parsed.
IPv6 may be entered in their usual form, with or without a netmask appended.
Only bit counts are accepted for IPv6 netmasks. In order to avoid any risk of
trouble with randomly resolved IP addresses, host names are never allowed in
IPv6 patterns.
HAProxy is also able to match IPv4 addresses with IPv6 addresses in the
following situations :
- tested address is IPv4, pattern address is IPv4, the match applies
in IPv4 using the supplied mask if any.
- tested address is IPv6, pattern address is IPv6, the match applies
in IPv6 using the supplied mask if any.
- tested address is IPv6, pattern address is IPv4, the match applies in IPv4
using the pattern's mask if the IPv6 address matches with 2002:IPV4::,
::IPV4 or ::ffff:IPV4, otherwise it fails.
- tested address is IPv4, pattern address is IPv6, the IPv4 address is first
converted to IPv6 by prefixing ::ffff: in front of it, then the match is
applied in IPv6 using the supplied IPv6 mask.
7.5. Available matching criteria
--------------------------------
7.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
------------------------------------
A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
addresses and ports, as well as internal values independent on the stream.
always_false
This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
always_true
This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
avg_queue <integer>
avg_queue(<backend>) <integer>
Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
"be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
be_conn <integer>
be_conn(<backend>) <integer>
Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
be_id <integer>
Applies to the backend's id. Can be used in frontends to check from which
backend it was called.
be_sess_rate <integer>
be_sess_rate(<backend>) <integer>
Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
sucking of an online dictionary).
Example :
# Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
backend dynamic
mode http
acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
srv_sess_rate(<backend>/<server>) <integer>
Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the server matches the
specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
latent requests from overloading servers).
Example :
# Redirect to a separate back
acl srv1_full srv_sess_rate(be1/srv1) gt 50
acl srv2_full srv_sess_rate(be1/srv2) gt 50
use_backend be2 if srv1_full or srv2_full
connslots <integer>
connslots(<backend>) <integer>
The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
available server queue slots.
Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
will be -1.
dst <ip_address>
Applies to the local IPv4 or IPv6 address the client connected to. It can be
used to switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
dst_conn <integer>
Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
"fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
dst_port <integer>
Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
to a different backend for some alternative ports.
fe_conn <integer>
fe_conn(<frontend>) <integer>
Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
criteria.
fe_id <integer>
Applies to the frontend's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
frontend it was called.
fe_sess_rate <integer>
fe_sess_rate(<frontend>) <integer>
Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
the rate to go down below the limit.
Example :
# This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
# concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
# force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
# 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
frontend mail
bind :25
mode tcp
maxconn 100
acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
nbsrv <integer>
nbsrv(<backend>) <integer>
Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
"monitor fail".
queue <integer>
queue(<backend>) <integer>
Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
sc1_bytes_in_rate <integer>
sc2_bytes_in_rate <integer>
Returns the average client-to-server bytes rate from the currently tracked
counters, measured in amount of bytes over the period configured in the
table. See also src_bytes_in_rate.
sc1_bytes_out_rate <integer>
sc2_bytes_out_rate <integer>
Returns the average server-to-client bytes rate from the currently tracked
counters, measured in amount of bytes over the period configured in the
table. See also src_bytes_out_rate.
sc1_clr_gpc0 <integer>
sc2_clr_gpc0 <integer>
Clears the first General Purpose Counter associated to the currently tracked
counters, and returns its previous value. Before the first invocation, the
stored value is zero, so first invocation will always return zero. This is
typically used as a second ACL in an expression in order to mark a connection
when a first ACL was verified :
# block if 5 consecutive requests continue to come faster than 10 sess
# per second, and reset the counter as soon as the traffic slows down.
acl abuse sc1_http_req_rate gt 10
acl kill sc1_inc_gpc0 gt 5
acl save sc1_clr_gpc0 ge 0
tcp-request connection accept if !abuse save
tcp-request connection reject if abuse kill
sc1_conn_cnt <integer>
sc2_conn_cnt <integer>
Returns the cumulated number of incoming connections from currently tracked
counters. See also src_conn_cnt.
sc1_conn_cur <integer>
sc2_conn_cur <integer>
Returns the current amount of concurrent connections tracking the same
tracked counters. This number is automatically incremented when tracking
begins and decremented when tracking stops. See also src_conn_cur.
sc1_conn_rate <integer>
sc2_conn_rate <integer>
Returns the average connection rate from the currently tracked counters,
measured in amount of connections over the period configured in the table.
See also src_conn_rate.
sc1_get_gpc0 <integer>
sc2_get_gpc0 <integer>
Returns the value of the first General Purpose Counter associated to the
currently tracked counters. See also src_get_gpc0 and sc1/sc2_inc_gpc0.
sc1_http_err_cnt <integer>
sc2_http_err_cnt <integer>
Returns the cumulated number of HTTP errors from the currently tracked
counters. This includes the both request errors and 4xx error responses.
See also src_http_err_cnt.
sc1_http_err_rate <integer>
sc2_http_err_rate <integer>
Returns the average rate of HTTP errors from the currently tracked counters,
measured in amount of errors over the period configured in the table. This
includes the both request errors and 4xx error responses. See also
src_http_err_rate.
sc1_http_req_cnt <integer>
sc2_http_req_cnt <integer>
Returns the cumulated number of HTTP requests from the currently tracked
counters. This includes every started request, valid or not. See also
src_http_req_cnt.
sc1_http_req_rate <integer>
sc2_http_req_rate <integer>
Returns the average rate of HTTP requests from the currently tracked
counters, measured in amount of requests over the period configured in
the table. This includes every started request, valid or not. See also
src_http_req_rate.
sc1_inc_gpc0 <integer>
sc2_inc_gpc0 <integer>
Increments the first General Purpose Counter associated to the currently
tracked counters, and returns its new value. Before the first invocation,
the stored value is zero, so first invocation will increase it to 1 and will
return 1. This is typically used as a second ACL in an expression in order
to mark a connection when a first ACL was verified :
acl abuse sc1_http_req_rate gt 10
acl kill sc1_inc_gpc0 gt 0
tcp-request connection reject if abuse kill
sc1_kbytes_in <integer>
sc2_kbytes_in <integer>
Returns the amount of client-to-server data from the currently tracked
counters, measured in kilobytes over the period configured in the table. The
test is currently performed on 32-bit integers, which limits values to 4
terabytes. See also src_kbytes_in.
sc1_kbytes_out <integer>
sc2_kbytes_out <integer>
Returns the amount of server-to-client data from the currently tracked
counters, measured in kilobytes over the period configured in the table. The
test is currently performed on 32-bit integers, which limits values to 4
terabytes. See also src_kbytes_out.
sc1_sess_cnt <integer>
sc2_sess_cnt <integer>
Returns the cumulated number of incoming connections that were transformed
into sessions, which means that they were accepted by a "tcp-request
connection" rule, from the currently tracked counters. A backend may count
more sessions than connections because each connection could result in many
backend sessions if some HTTP keep-alive is performed over the connection
with the client. See also src_sess_cnt.
sc1_sess_rate <integer>
sc2_sess_rate <integer>
Returns the average session rate from the currently tracked counters,
measured in amount of sessions over the period configured in the table. A
session is a connection that got past the early "tcp-request connection"
rules. A backend may count more sessions than connections because each
connection could result in many backend sessions if some HTTP keep-alive is
performed over the connection with the client. See also src_sess_rate.
sc1_trackers <integer>
sc2_trackers <integer>
Returns the current amount of concurrent connections tracking the same
tracked counters. This number is automatically incremented when tracking
begins and decremented when tracking stops. It differs from sc1_conn_cur in
that it does not rely on any stored information but on the table's reference
count (the "use" value which is returned by "show table" on the CLI). This
may sometimes be more suited for layer7 tracking.
so_id <integer>
Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
src <ip_address>
Applies to the client's IPv4 or IPv6 address. It is usually used to limit
access to certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level
source address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
src_bytes_in_rate <integer>
src_bytes_in_rate(<table>) <integer>
Returns the average bytes rate from the connection's source IPv4 address in
the current proxy's stick-table or in the designated stick-table, measured in
amount of bytes over the period configured in the table. If the address is
not found, zero is returned. See also sc1/sc2_bytes_in_rate.
src_bytes_out_rate <integer>
src_bytes_out_rate(<table>) <integer>
Returns the average bytes rate to the connection's source IPv4 address in the
current proxy's stick-table or in the designated stick-table, measured in
amount of bytes over the period configured in the table. If the address is
not found, zero is returned. See also sc1/sc2_bytes_out_rate.
src_clr_gpc0 <integer>
src_clr_gpc0(<table>) <integer>
Clears the first General Purpose Counter associated to the connection's
source IPv4 address in the current proxy's stick-table or in the designated
stick-table, and returns its previous value. If the address is not found, an
entry is created and 0 is returned. This is typically used as a second ACL in
an expression in order to mark a connection when a first ACL was verified :
# block if 5 consecutive requests continue to come faster than 10 sess
# per second, and reset the counter as soon as the traffic slows down.
acl abuse src_http_req_rate gt 10
acl kill src_inc_gpc0 gt 5
acl save src_clr_gpc0 ge 0
tcp-request connection accept if !abuse save
tcp-request connection reject if abuse kill
src_conn_cnt <integer>
src_conn_cnt(<table>) <integer>
Returns the cumulated number of connections initiated from the current
connection's source IPv4 address in the current proxy's stick-table or in
the designated stick-table. If the address is not found, zero is returned.
See also sc1/sc2_conn_cnt.
src_conn_cur <integer>
src_conn_cur(<table>) <integer>
Returns the current amount of concurrent connections initiated from the
current connection's source IPv4 address in the current proxy's stick-table
or in the designated stick-table. If the address is not found, zero is
returned. See also sc1/sc2_conn_cur.
src_conn_rate <integer>
src_conn_rate(<table>) <integer>
Returns the average connection rate from the connection's source IPv4 address
in the current proxy's stick-table or in the designated stick-table, measured
in amount of connections over the period configured in the table. If the
address is not found, zero is returned. See also sc1/sc2_conn_rate.
src_get_gpc0 <integer>
src_get_gpc0(<table>) <integer>
Returns the value of the first General Purpose Counter associated to the
connection's source IPv4 address in the current proxy's stick-table or in
the designated stick-table. If the address is not found, zero is returned.
See also sc1/sc2_get_gpc0 and src_inc_gpc0.
src_http_err_cnt <integer>
src_http_err_cnt(<table>) <integer>
Returns the cumulated number of HTTP errors from the current connection's
source IPv4 address in the current proxy's stick-table or in the designated
stick-table. This includes the both request errors and 4xx error responses.
If the address is not found, zero is returned. See also sc1/sc2_http_err_cnt.
src_http_err_rate <integer>
src_http_err_rate(<table>) <integer>
Returns the average rate of HTTP errors from the current connection's source
IPv4 address in the current proxy's stick-table or in the designated stick-
table, measured in amount of errors over the period configured in the table.
This includes the both request errors and 4xx error responses. If the address
is not found, zero is returned. See also sc1/sc2_http_err_rate.
src_http_req_cnt <integer>
src_http_req_cnt(<table>) <integer>
Returns the cumulated number of HTTP requests from the current connection's
source IPv4 address in the current proxy's stick-table or in the designated
stick-table. This includes every started request, valid or not. If the
address is not found, zero is returned. See also sc1/sc2_http_req_cnt.
src_http_req_rate <integer>
src_http_req_rate(<table>) <integer>
Returns the average rate of HTTP requests from the current connection's
source IPv4 address in the current proxy's stick-table or in the designated
stick-table, measured in amount of requests over the period configured in the
table. This includes every started request, valid or not. If the address is
not found, zero is returned. See also sc1/sc2_http_req_rate.
src_inc_gpc0 <integer>
src_inc_gpc0(<table>) <integer>
Increments the first General Purpose Counter associated to the connection's
source IPv4 address in the current proxy's stick-table or in the designated
stick-table, and returns its new value. If the address is not found, an entry
is created and 1 is returned. This is typically used as a second ACL in an
expression in order to mark a connection when a first ACL was verified :
acl abuse src_http_req_rate gt 10
acl kill src_inc_gpc0 gt 0
tcp-request connection reject if abuse kill
src_kbytes_in <integer>
src_kbytes_in(<table>) <integer>
Returns the amount of data received from the connection's source IPv4 address
in the current proxy's stick-table or in the designated stick-table, measured
in kilobytes over the period configured in the table. If the address is not
found, zero is returned. The test is currently performed on 32-bit integers,
which limits values to 4 terabytes. See also sc1/sc2_kbytes_in.
src_kbytes_out <integer>
src_kbytes_out(<table>) <integer>
Returns the amount of data sent to the connection's source IPv4 address in
the current proxy's stick-table or in the designated stick-table, measured
in kilobytes over the period configured in the table. If the address is not
found, zero is returned. The test is currently performed on 32-bit integers,
which limits values to 4 terabytes. See also sc1/sc2_kbytes_out.
src_port <integer>
Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
src_sess_cnt <integer>
src_sess_cnt(<table>) <integer>
Returns the cumulated number of connections initiated from the current
connection's source IPv4 address in the current proxy's stick-table or in the
designated stick-table, that were transformed into sessions, which means that
they were accepted by "tcp-request" rules. If the address is not found, zero
is returned. See also sc1/sc2_sess_cnt.
src_sess_rate <integer>
src_sess_rate(<table>) <integer>
Returns the average session rate from the connection's source IPv4 address in
the current proxy's stick-table or in the designated stick-table, measured in
amount of sessions over the period configured in the table. A session is a
connection that got past the early "tcp-request" rules. If the address is not
found, zero is returned. See also sc1/sc2_sess_rate.
src_updt_conn_cnt <integer>
src_updt_conn_cnt(<table>) <integer>
Creates or updates the entry associated to the source IPv4 address in the
current proxy's stick-table or in the designated stick-table. This table
must be configured to store the "conn_cnt" data type, otherwise the match
will be ignored. The current count is incremented by one, and the expiration
timer refreshed. The updated count is returned, so this match can't return
zero. This is used to reject service abusers based on their source address.
Note: it is recommended to use the more complete "track-counters" instead.
Example :
# This frontend limits incoming SSH connections to 3 per 10 second for
# each source address, and rejects excess connections until a 10 second
# silence is observed. At most 20 addresses are tracked.
listen ssh
bind :22
mode tcp
maxconn 100
stick-table type ip size 20 expire 10s store conn_cnt
tcp-request content reject if { src_update_count gt 3 }
server local 127.0.0.1:22
srv_conn(<backend>/<server>) <integer>
Applies to the number of currently established connections on the server,
possibly including the connection being evaluated.
It can be used to use a specific farm when one server is full.
See also the "fe_conn", "be_conn" and "queue" criteria.
srv_id <integer>
Applies to the server's id. Can be used in frontends or backends.
srv_is_up(<server>)
srv_is_up(<backend>/<server>)
Returns true when the designated server is UP, and false when it is either
DOWN or in maintenance mode. If <backend> is omitted, then the server is
looked up in the current backend. The function takes no arguments since it
is used as a boolean. It is mainly used to take action based on an external
status reported via a health check (eg: a geographical site's availability).
Another possible use which is more of a hack consists in using dummy servers
as boolean variables that can be enabled or disabled from the CLI, so that
rules depending on those ACLs can be tweaked in realtime.
table_avl <integer>
table_avl(<table>) <integer>
Returns the total number of available entries in the current proxy's
stick-table or in the designated stick-table. See also table_cnt.
table_cnt <integer>
table_cnt(<table>) <integer>
Returns the total number of entries currently in use in the current proxy's
stick-table or in the designated stick-table. See also src_conn_cnt and
table_avl for other entry counting methods.
7.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4 (also called Layer 6)
---------------------------------------------------------
A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request content"
keyword for more detailed information on the subject.
rep_ssl_hello_type <integer>
Returns true when data in the response buffer looks like a complete SSL (v3
or superior) hello message and handshake type is equal to <integer>.
This test was designed to be used with TCP response content inspection: a
SSL session ID may be fetched. Note that this only applies to raw contents
found in the request buffer and not to contents deciphered via an SSL data
layer, so this will not work with "bind" lines having the "ssl" option.
req_len <integer>
Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
req_proto_http
Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
using TCP request content inspection rules.
req_rdp_cookie <string>
req_rdp_cookie(<name>) <string>
Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
req_rdp_cookie_cnt(<name>) <integer>
Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
cookies.
req_ssl_hello_type <integer>
Returns true when data in the request buffer looks like a complete SSL (v3
or superior) hello message and handshake type is equal to <integer>.
This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection: an
SSL session ID may be fetched. Note that this only applies to raw contents
found in the request buffer and not to contents deciphered via an SSL data
layer, so this will not work with "bind" lines having the "ssl" option.
req_ssl_sni <string>
Returns true when data in the request buffer looks like a complete SSL (v3
or superior) client hello message with a Server Name Indication TLS extension
(SNI) matching <string>. SNI normally contains the name of the host the
client tries to connect to (for recent browsers). SNI is useful for allowing
or denying access to certain hosts when SSL/TLS is used by the client. This
test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection. If content
switching is needed, it is recommended to first wait for a complete client
hello (type 1), like in the example below. Note that this only applies to raw
contents found in the request buffer and not to contents deciphered via an
SSL transport layer, so this will not work with "bind" lines having the "ssl"
option. See also "ssl_sni" below.
Examples :
# Wait for a client hello for at most 5 seconds
tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
tcp-request content accept if { req_ssl_hello_type 1 }
use_backend bk_allow if { req_ssl_sni -f allowed_sites }
default_backend bk_sorry_page
req_ssl_ver <decimal>
Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
with TCP request content inspection. Note that this only applies to raw
contents found in the request buffer and not to contents deciphered via an
SSL transport layer, so this will not work with "bind" lines having the "ssl"
option.
ssl_c_ca_err <integer>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the ID of the first error detected during verification of the
client certificate at depth > 0 matches the specified value (check man verify
for possible values). Note that error zero means no error was encountered
during this verification process.
ssl_c_ca_err_depth <integer>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the depth in the CA chain of the first error detected during the
verification of the client certificate matches the specified value. When no
error is found, depth 0 is returned.
ssl_c_err <integer>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the ID of the first error detected during verification at depth==0
matches the specified value (check man verify for possible values). Note that
error zero means no error was encountered during this verification process.
ssl_c_i_dn <string>
ssl_c_i_dn(entry[,occ]) <string>
If no entry specified, returns true when the incoming connection was made
over an SSL/TLS transport layer, and the full distinguished name of the
issuer of the certificate presented by the client matches the specified
string. Otherwise returns true if the value of the first given entry from
the beginning of the DN matches the specified string. If a positive/negative
occurrence number is specified as the optional second argument, it returns
true if the value of the nth given entry value from the beginning/end of the
DN matches the specified string.
ssl_c_key_alg <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the name of the algorithm used to generate the key of the
certificate presented by the client matches the string.
ssl_c_notafter <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the end date of the certificate presented by the client matches
the string formatted as YYMMDDhhmmss[Z].
ssl_c_notbefore <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the start date of the certificate presented by the client matches
the string formatted as YYMMDDhhmmss[Z].
ssl_c_s_dn <string>
ssl_c_s_dn(entry[,occ]) <string>
If no entry specified, returns true when the incoming connection was made
over an SSL/TLS transport layer, and the full distinguished name of the
subject of the certificate presented by the client matches the specified
string. Otherwise returns true if the value of the first given entry from
the beginning of the DN matches the specified string. If a positive/negative
occurrence number is specified as the optional second argument, it returns
true if the value of the nth given entry value from the beginning/end of the
DN matches the specified string.
ssl_c_serial <hexa>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the serial of the certificate presented by the client matches
the value written in hexa.
ssl_c_sig_alg <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the name of the algorithm used to sign the certificate presented
by the client matches the string.
ssl_c_used
Returns true if current SSL session uses a client certificate even if current
connection uses SSL session resumption. See also "ssl_fc_has_crt".
ssl_c_verify <integer>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the verify result matches the specified value (check man verify
for possible values). Zero indicates no error was detected.
ssl_c_version <integer>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the version of the certificate presented by the client matches
the value.
ssl_f_i_dn <string>
ssl_f_i_dn(entry[,occ]) <string>
If no entry specified, returns true when the incoming connection was made
over an SSL/TLS transport layer, and the full distinguished name of the
issuer of the certificate presented by the frontend matches the specified
string. Otherwise returns true if the value of the first given entry from
the beginning of the DN matches the specified string. If a positive/negative
occurrence number is specified as the optional second argument, it returns
true if the value of the nth given entry value from the beginning/end of the
DN matches the specified string.
ssl_c_key_alg <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the name of the algorithm used to generate the key of the
certificate presented by the frontend matches the string.
ssl_f_notafter <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the end date of the certificate presented by the frontend matches
the string formatted as YYMMDDhhmmss[Z].
ssl_f_notbefore <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the start date of the certificate presented by the frontend matches
the string formatted as YYMMDDhhmmss[Z].
ssl_f_s_dn <string>
ssl_f_s_dn(entry[,occ]) <string>
If no entry specified, returns true when the incoming connection was made
over an SSL/TLS transport layer, and the full distinguished name of the
subject of the certificate presented by the frontend matches the specified
string. Otherwise returns true if the value of the first given entry from
the beginning of the DN matches the specified string. If a positive/negative
occurrence number is specified as the optional second argument, it returns
true if the value of the nth given entry value from the beginning/end of the
DN matches the specified string.
ssl_f_serial <hexa>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the serial of the certificate presented by the frontend matches
the value written in hexa.
ssl_f_sig_alg <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the name of the algorithm used to sign the certificate presented
by the frontend matches the string.
ssl_f_version <integer>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer, and the version of the certificate presented by the frontend matches
the value.
ssl_fc
Returns true when the front connection was made via an SSL/TLS transport
layer and is locally deciphered. This means it has matched a socket declared
with a "bind" line having the "ssl" option.
ssl_fc_alg_keysize <integer>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer and the symmetric cipher key size supported in bits matches the value.
ssl_fc_cipher <string>
returns true when the incoming connection was made over an ssl/tls transport
layer and the name of the used cipher matches the string.
ssl_fc_has_crt
Returns true if a client certificate is present in an incoming connection over
SSL/TLS transport layer. Useful if 'verify' statement is set to 'optional'.
Note: on SSL session resumption with Session ID or TLS ticket, client
certificate is not present in the current connection but may be retrieved
from the cache or the ticket. So prefer "ssl_c_used" if you want to check if
current SSL session uses a client certificate.
ssl_fc_has_sni
This is used to check for presence of a Server Name Indication TLS extension
in an incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport layer. Returns
true when the incoming connection presents a TLS SNI field. This requires
that the SSL library is build with support for TLS extensions enabled (check
haproxy -vv).
ssl_fc_npn <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer which deciphered it and found a Next Protocol Negociation TLS extension
sent by the client, matching the specified string. This requires that the SSL
library is build with support for TLS extensions enabled (check haproxy -vv).
Note that the TLS NPN extension is not advertised unless the "npn" keyword on
the "bind" line specifies a protocol list. Also, nothing forces the client to
pick a protocol from this list, any other one may be requested.
ssl_fc_protocol <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer and the name of the used protocol matches the string.
ssl_fc_sni <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer which deciphered it and found a Server Name Indication TLS extension
sent by the client, matching the specified string. In HTTPS, the SNI field
(when present) is equal to the requested host name. This match is different
from "req_ssl_sni" above in that it applies to the connection being
deciphered by haproxy and not to SSL contents being blindly forwarded.
See also "ssl_fc_sni_end" and "ssl_fc_sni_req" below. This requires that the
SSL library is build with support for TLS extensions enabled (check
haproxy -vv).
ssl_fc_sni_end <string>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer which deciphered it and found a Server Name Indication TLS extension
sent by the client, ending like the specified string. In HTTPS, the SNI field
(when present) is equal to the requested host name. This match is different
from "req_ssl_sni" above in that it applies to the connection being
deciphered by haproxy and not to SSL contents being blindly forwarded. This
requires that the SSL library is build with support for TLS extensions
enabled (check haproxy -vv).
ssl_fc_sni_reg <regex>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer which deciphered it and found a Server Name Indication TLS extension
sent by the client, matching the specified regex. In HTTPS, the SNI field
(when present) is equal to the requested host name. This match is different
from "req_ssl_sni" above in that it applies to the connection being
deciphered by haproxy and not to SSL contents being blindly forwarded. This
requires that the SSL library is build with support for TLS extensions
enabled (check haproxy -vv).
ssl_fc_use_keysize <integer>
Returns true when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer and the symmetric cipher key size used in bits matches the value.
wait_end
Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
inspection.
Examples :
# delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
# don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
tcp-request content accept if goodguys
tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
tcp-request content reject
7.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
--------------------------
A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
base <string>
Returns true when the concatenation of the first Host header and the path
part of the request, which starts at the first slash and ends before the
question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be used to match known
files in virtual hosting environments, such as "www.example.com/favicon.ico".
See also "path" and "uri".
base_beg <string>
Returns true when the base (see above) begins with one of the strings. This
can be used to send certain directory names to alternative backends. See also
"path_beg".
base_dir <string>
Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
slashes in the base (see above). Probably of little use, see "url_dir" and
"path_dir" instead.
base_dom <string>
Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
in the base (see above). Probably of little use, see "path_dom" and "url_dom"
instead.
base_end <string>
Returns true when the base (see above) ends with one of the strings. This may
be used to control file name extension, though "path_end" is cheaper.
base_len <integer>
Returns true when the base (see above) length matches the values or ranges
specified. This may be used to detect abusive requests for instance.
base_reg <regex>
Returns true when the base (see above) matches one of the regular
expressions. It can be used any time, but it is important to remember that
regex matching is slower than other methods. See also "path_reg", "url_reg"
and all "base_" criteria.
base_sub <string>
Returns true when the base (see above) contains one of the strings. It can be
used to detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See
also "base_dir".
cook(<name>) <string>
All "cook*" matching criteria inspect all "Cookie" headers to find a cookie
with the name between parenthesis. If multiple occurrences of the cookie are
found in the request, they will all be evaluated. Spaces around the name and
the value are ignored as requested by the Cookie specification (RFC6265). The
cookie name is case-sensitive. Use the scook() variant for response cookies
sent by the server.
The "cook" criteria returns true if any of the request cookies <name> match
any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For instance,
checking that the "profile" cookie is set to either "silver" or "gold" :
cook(profile) silver gold
cook_beg(<name>) <string>
Returns true if any of the request cookies <name> begins with one of the
strings. See "cook" for more information on cookie matching. Use the
scook_beg() variant for response cookies sent by the server.
cook_cnt(<name>) <integer>
Returns true when the number of occurrences of the specified cookie matches
the values or ranges specified. This is used to detect presence, absence or
abuse of a specific cookie. See "cook" for more information on header
matching. Use the scook_cnt() variant for response cookies sent by the
server.
cook_dir(<name>) <string>
Returns true if any of the request cookies <name> contains one of the strings
either isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
directory name matching, though it generally is of limited use with cookies.
See "cook" for more information on cookie matching. Use the scook_dir()
variant for response cookies sent by the server.
cook_dom(<name>) <string>
Returns true if any of the request cookies <name> contains one of the strings
either isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name
matching. See "cook" for more information on cookie matching. Use the
scook_dom() variant for response cookies sent by the server.
cook_end(<name>) <string>
Returns true if any of the request cookies <name> ends with one of the
strings. See "cook" for more information on cookie matching. Use the
scook_end() variant for response cookies sent by the server.
cook_len(<name>) <integer>
Returns true if any of the request cookies <name> has a length which matches
the values or ranges specified. This may be used to detect empty or too large
cookie values. Note that an absent cookie does not match a zero-length test.
See "cook" for more information on cookie matching. Use the scook_len()
variant for response cookies sent by the server.
cook_reg(<name>) <regex>
Returns true if any of the request cookies <name> matches any of the regular
expressions. It can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that
regex matching is slower than other methods. See also other "cook_" criteria,
as well as "cook" for more information on cookie matching. Use the
scook_reg() variant for response cookies sent by the server.
cook_sub(<name>) <string>
Returns true if any of the request cookies <name> contains at least one of
the strings. See "cook" for more information on cookie matching. Use the
scook_sub() variant for response cookies sent by the server.
cook_val(<name>) <integer>
Returns true if any of the request cookies <name> starts with a number which
matches the values or ranges specified. This may be used to select a server
based on application-specific cookies. Note that an absent cookie does not
match any value. See "cook" for more information on cookie matching. Use the
scook_val() variant for response cookies sent by the server.
hdr <string>
hdr(<header>[,<occ>]) <string>
Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
If an occurrence number is specified as the optional second argument, only
this occurrence will be considered. Positive values indicate a position from
the first occurrence, 1 being the first one. Negative values indicate
positions relative to the last one, -1 being the last one. Use the shdr()
variant for response headers sent by the server.
The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
match any of the strings. This can be used to check for exact values. For
instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
hdr(Connection) -i close
hdr_beg <string>
hdr_beg(<header>[,<occ>]) <string>
Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
"hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
response headers sent by the server.
hdr_cnt <integer>
hdr_cnt(<header>) <integer>
Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
hdr_dir <string>
hdr_dir(<header>[,<occ>]) <string>
Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
headers sent by the server.
hdr_dom <string>
hdr_dom(<header>[,<occ>]) <string>
Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
server.
hdr_end <string>
hdr_end(<header>[,<occ>]) <string>
Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
response headers sent by the server.
hdr_ip <ip_address>
hdr_ip(<header>[,<occ>]) <address>
Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IPv4 or IPv6 address
matching <address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For
or X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
hdr_len <integer>
hdr_len(<header>[,<occ>]) <integer>
Returns true when at least one of the headers has a length which matches the
values or ranges specified. This may be used to detect empty or too large
headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
shdr_len() variant for response headers sent by the server.
hdr_reg <regex>
hdr_reg(<header>[,<occ>]) <regex>
Returns true it one of the headers matches one of the regular expressions. It
can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
"hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
response headers sent by the server.
hdr_sub <string>
hdr_sub(<header>[,<occ>]) <string>
Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
response headers sent by the server.
hdr_val <integer>
hdr_val(<header>[,<occ>]) <integer>
Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
http_auth(<userlist>)
http_auth_group(<userlist>) <group> [<group>]*
Returns true when authentication data received from the client matches
username & password stored on the userlist. It is also possible to
use http_auth_group to check if the user is assigned to at least one
of specified groups.
Currently only http basic auth is supported.
http_first_req
Returns true when the request being processed is the first one of the
connection. This can be used to add or remove headers that may be missing
from some requests when a request is not the first one, or even to perform
some specific ACL checks only on the first request.
method <string>
Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
already check for most common methods.
path <string>
Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
path_beg <string>
Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
path_dir <string>
Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
"url_dir" and "path_sub".
path_dom <string>
Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
path_end <string>
Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
control file name extension.
path_len <integer>
Returns true when the path length matches the values or ranges specified.
This may be used to detect abusive requests for instance.
path_reg <regex>
Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
path_sub <string>
Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
"path_dir".
payload(<offset>,<length>) <string>
Returns true if the block of <length> bytes, starting at byte <offset> in the
request or response buffer (depending on the rule) exactly matches one of the
strings.
payload_lv(<offset1>,<length>[,<offset2>])
Returns true if the block whose size is specified at <offset1> for <length>
bytes, and which starts at <offset2> if specified or just after the length in
the request or response buffer (depending on the rule) exactly matches one of
the strings. The <offset2> parameter also supports relative offsets if
prepended with a '+' or '-' sign.
req_ver <string>
Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
status <integer>
Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
url <string>
Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
"*", for which there already is a predefined ACL. See also "base".
url_beg <string>
Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme. See also
"base_beg".
url_dir <string>
Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
"path_dir" and "url_sub".
url_dom <string>
Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
url_end <string>
Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
url_ip <address>
Applies to the IPv4 or IPv6 address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP
request. It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local
network. It is useful with option "http_proxy".
url_len <integer>
Returns true when the url length matches the values or ranges specified. This
may be used to detect abusive requests for instance.
url_port <integer>
Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
"http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
is assumed.
url_reg <regex>
Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
than other methods. See also "base_reg", "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
url_sub <string>
Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
urlp(<name>) <string>
Note: all "urlp*" matching criteria apply to the first occurrence of the
parameter <name> in the query string. The parameter name is case-sensitive.
The "urlp" matching criteria returns true if the designated URL parameter
matches any of the strings. This can be used to check for exact values.
urlp_beg(<name>) <string>
Returns true when the URL parameter "<name>" begins with one of the strings.
This can be used to check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a
protocol scheme.
urlp_dir(<name>) <string>
Returns true when the URL parameter "<name>" contains one of the strings
either isolated or delimited with slashes. This is used to perform filename
or directory name matching in a specific URL parameter without the risk of
wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "path_dir" and "urlp_sub".
urlp_dom(<name>) <string>
Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
in the URL parameter "<name>". This is used to perform domain name matching
in a specific URL parameter without the risk of wrong match due to colliding
prefixes. See also "urlp_sub".
urlp_end(<name>) <string>
Returns true when the URL parameter "<name>" ends with one of the strings.
urlp_ip(<name>) <ip_address>
Returns true when the URL parameter "<name>" contains an IPv4 or IPv6 address
which matches one of the specified addresses.
urlp_len(<name>) <integer>
Returns true when the URL parameter "<name>" has a length matching the values
or ranges specified. This is used to detect abusive requests for instance.
urlp_reg(<name>) <regex>
Returns true when the URL parameter "<name>" matches one of the regular
expressions. It can be used any time, but it is important to remember that
regex matching is slower than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all
"urlp_" criteria.
urlp_sub(<name>) <string>
Returns true when the URL parameter "<name>" contains one of the strings. It
can be used to detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See
also "path_sub" and other "urlp_" criteria.
urlp_val(<name>) <integer>
Returns true when the URL parameter "<name>" starts with a number matching
the values or ranges specified. Note that the absence of the parameter does
not match anything. Integers are unsigned so it is not possible to match
negative data.
7.6. Pre-defined ACLs
---------------------
Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below.
ACL name Equivalent to Usage
---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
FALSE always_false never match
HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
TRUE always_true always match
WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
7.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
----------------------------------
Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
- AND (implicit)
- OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
- Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
[!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
# now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
# of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
use_backend www if host_www
It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
the braces must be seen as independent words). Example :
The following rule :
acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
block if METH_POST missing_cl
Can also be written that way :
block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
good use is the following :
With named ACLs :
acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
monitor fail if site_dead
With anonymous ACLs :
monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
7.8. Pattern extraction
-----------------------
The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
equivalent used in ACLs.
The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
base This returns the concatenation of the first Host header and the
path part of the request, which starts at the first slash and
ends before the question mark. It can be useful in virtual
hosted environments to detect URL abuses as well as to improve
shared caches efficiency. Using this with a limited size stick
table also allows one to collect statistics about most commonly
requested objects by host/path.
base32 This returns a 32-bit hash of the value returned by the "base"
fetch method above. This is useful to track per-URL activity on
high traffic sites without having to store all URLs. Instead a
shorter hash is stored, saving a lot of memory. The output type
is an unsigned integer.
base32+src This returns the concatenation of the base32 fetch above and the
src fetch below. The resulting type is of type binary, with a
size of 8 or 20 bytes depending on the source address family.
This can be used to track per-IP, per-URL counters.
src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
It is of type IPv4 and works on both IPv4 and IPv6 tables.
On IPv6 tables, IPv4 address is mapped to its IPv6 equivalent,
according to RFC 4291.
dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
client side, which is the address the client connected to.
It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
type IPv4 and works on both IPv4 and IPv6 tables.
On IPv6 tables, IPv4 address is mapped to its IPv6 equivalent,
according to RFC 4291.
dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
type integer and only works with such tables.
hdr(<name>[,<occ>])
This extracts the last occurrence of header <name> in an HTTP
request. Optionally, a specific occurrence might be specified as
a position number. Positive values indicate a position from the
first occurrence, with 1 being the first one. Negative values
indicate positions relative to the last one, with -1 being the
last one. A typical use is with the X-Forwarded-For header once
converted to IP, associated with an IP stick-table.
path This extracts the request's URL path (without the host part). A
typical use is with prefetch-capable caches, and with portals
which need to aggregate multiple information from databases and
keep them in caches. Note that with outgoing caches, it would be
wiser to use "url" instead.
payload(<offset>,<length>)
This extracts a binary block of <length> bytes, and starting
at bytes <offset> in the buffer of request or response (request
on "stick on" or "stick match" or response in on "stick store
response").
payload_lv(<offset1>,<length>[,<offset2>])
This extracts a binary block. In a first step the size of the
block is read from response or request buffer at <offset>
bytes and considered coded on <length> bytes. In a second step
data of the block are read from buffer at <offset2> bytes
(by default <lengthoffset> + <lengthsize>).
If <offset2> is prefixed by '+' or '-', it is relative to
<lengthoffset> + <lengthsize> else it is absolute.
Ex: see SSL session id example in "stick table" chapter.
src_port This is the source TCP port of the session on the client side,
which is the port the client connected from. It is very unlikely
that this function will be useful but it's available at no cost.
It is of type integer and only works with such tables.
ssl_c_ca_err Returns the ID of the first error detected during verify of the
client certificate at depth > 0, or 0 if no error was detected.
ssl_c_ca_err_depth
Returns the depth of the first error detected during verify. If
no error is encountered in the CA chain, zero is returned.
ssl_c_err Returns the ID of the first error detected during verify of the
client certificate at depth == 0, or 0 if no errors.
ssl_c_i_dn[(entry[,occ])]
If no entry specified, returns the full distinguished name of
the issuer of the certificate presented by the client when
the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer. Otherwise returns the value of the first given entry
found from the beginning of the DN. If a positive/negative
occurrence number is specified as the optional second argument,
it returns the value of the nth given entry found from the
beginning/end of the DN. For instance to retrieve the common
name ssl_c_i_dn(CN) and the second organization unit
ssl_c_i_dn(OU,2).
ssl_c_key_alg
Returns the name of the algorithm used to generate the key of
the certificate presented by the client when the incoming
connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
ssl_c_notafter
Returns the end date presented by the client as a formatted
string YYMMDDhhmmss[Z] when the incoming connection was made
over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
ssl_c_notbefore
Returns the start date presented by the client as a formatted
string YYMMDDhhmmss[Z] when the incoming connection was made
over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
ssl_c_s_dn[(entry[,occ])]
If no entry specified, returns the full distinguished name of
the subject of the certificate presented by the client when
the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer. Otherwise returns the value of the first given entry
found from the beginning of the DN. If a positive/negative
occurrence number is specified as the optional second argument,
it returns the value of the nth given entry found from the
beginning/end of the DN. For instance to retrieve the common
name ssl_c_s_dn(CN) and the second organization unit
ssl_c_s_dn(OU,2).
ssl_c_serial Returns the serial of the certificate presented by the client
when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer.
ssl_c_sig_alg
Returns the name of the algorithm used to sign the certificate
presented by the client when the incoming connection was made
over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
ssl_c_used
Returns 1 if current SSL session use a client certificate,
otherwise 0. See also "ssl_fc_has_crt".
ssl_c_verify Returns the verify result errorID when the incoming connection
was made over an SSL/TLS transport layer, otherwise zero if no
error is encountered.
ssl_c_version
Returns the version of the certificate presented by the client
when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer.
ssl_f_i_dn[(entry[,occ])]
If no entry specified, returns the full distinguished name of
the issuer of the certificate presented by the frontend when
the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer. Otherwise returns the value of the first given entry
found from the beginning of the DN. If a positive/negative
occurrence number is specified as the optional second argument,
it returns the value of the nth given entry found from the
beginning/end of the DN. For instance to retrieve the common
name ssl_f_i_dn(CN) and the second organization unit
ssl_f_i_dn(OU,2).
ssl_f_key_alg
Returns the name of the algorithm used to generate the key of
the certificate presented by the frontend when the incoming
connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
ssl_f_notafter
Returns the end date presented by the frontend as a formatted
string YYMMDDhhmmss[Z] when the incoming connection was made
over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
ssl_f_notbefore
Returns the start date presented by the frontend as a formatted
string YYMMDDhhmmss[Z] when the incoming connection was made
over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
ssl_f_s_dn[(entry[,occ])]
If no entry specified, returns the full distinguished name of
the subject of the certificate presented by the frontend when
the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer. Otherwise returns the value of the first given entry
found from the beginning of the DN. If a positive/negative
occurrence number is specified as the optional second argument,
it returns the value of the nth given entry found from the
beginning/end of the DN. For instance to retrieve the common
name ssl_f_s_dn(CN) and the second organization unit
ssl_f_s_dn(OU,2).
ssl_f_serial Returns the serial of the certificate presented by the frontend
when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer.
ssl_f_sig_alg
Returns the name of the algorithm used to sign the certificate
presented by the frontend when the incoming connection was made
over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
ssl_f_version
Returns the version of the certificate presented by the frontend
when the incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport
layer.
ssl_fc This checks the transport layer used on the front connection,
and returns 1 if it was made via an SSL/TLS transport layer,
otherwise zero.
ssl_fc_alg_keysize
Returns the symmetric cipher key size support d in bits when the
incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
ssl_fc_cipher
Returns the name of the used cipher when the incoming connection
was made over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
ssl_fc_has_crt
Returns 1 if a client certificate is present in the front
connection over SSL/TLS transport layer, otherwise 0.
Note: on SSL session resumption with Session ID or TLS ticket,
client certificate is not present in the current connection but
may be retrieved from the cache or the ticket. So prefer
"ssl_c_used" if you want to check if current SSL session uses
a client certificate.
ssl_fc_has_sni
This checks the transport layer used by the front connection, and
returns 1 if the connection was made via an SSL/TLS transport
layer and the client sent a Server Name Indication TLS extension,
otherwise zero. This requires that the SSL library is build with
support for TLS extensions enabled (check haproxy -vv).
ssl_fc_npn This extracts the Next Protocol Negociation field from an
incoming connection made via an SSL/TLS transport layer and
locally deciphered by haproxy. The result is a string containing
the protocol name advertised by the client. The SSL library must
have been built with support for TLS extensions enabled (check
haproxy -vv). See also the "npn" bind keyword.
ssl_fc_protocol
Returns the name of the used protocol when the incoming
connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
ssl_fc_session_id
Returns the SSL ID of the front connection when the incoming
connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport layer. Useful to
stick on a given client.
ssl_fc_sni This extracts the Server Name Indication field from an incoming
connection made via an SSL/TLS transport layer and locally
deciphered by haproxy. The result typically is a string matching
the HTTPS host name (253 chars or less). The SSL library must
have been built with support for TLS extensions enabled (check
haproxy -vv).
ssl_fc_use_keysize
Returns the symmetric cipher key size used in bits when the
incoming connection was made over an SSL/TLS transport layer.
url This extracts the request's URL as presented in the request. A
typical use is with prefetch-capable caches, and with portals
which need to aggregate multiple information from databases and
keep them in caches. See also "path".
url_ip This extracts the IP address from the request's URL when the
host part is presented as an IP address. Its use is very
limited. For instance, a monitoring system might use this field
as an alternative for the source IP in order to test what path a
given source address would follow, or to force an entry in a
table for a given source address.
url_port This extracts the port part from the request's URL. It probably
is totally useless but it was available at no cost.
url_param(<name>[,<delim>])
This extracts the first occurrence of the parameter <name> in
the parameter string of the request and uses the corresponding
value to match. Optionally, a delimiter can be provided. If not
then the question mark '?' is used by default.
A typical use is to get sticky session through url for cases
where cookies cannot be used.
Example :
# match http://example.com/foo?PHPSESSIONID=some_id
stick on url_param(PHPSESSIONID)
# match http://example.com/foo;JSESSIONID=some_id
stick on url_param(JSESSIONID,;)
rdp_cookie(<name>)
This extracts the value of the rdp cookie <name> as a string
and uses this value to match. This enables implementation of
persistence based on the mstshash cookie. This is typically
done if there is no msts cookie present.
This differs from "balance rdp-cookie" in that any balancing
algorithm may be used and thus the distribution of clients
to backend servers is not linked to a hash of the RDP
cookie. It is envisaged that using a balancing algorithm
such as "balance roundrobin" or "balance leastconnect" will
lead to a more even distribution of clients to backend
servers than the hash used by "balance rdp-cookie".
Example :
listen tse-farm
bind 0.0.0.0:3389
# wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
# apply RDP cookie persistence
persist rdp-cookie
# Persist based on the mstshash cookie
# This is only useful makes sense if
# balance rdp-cookie is not used
stick-table type string size 204800
stick on rdp_cookie(mstshash)
server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
server srv1 1.1.1.2:3389
See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "persist rdp-cookie",
"tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
cookie(<name>)
This extracts the last occurrence of the cookie name <name> on a
"Cookie" header line from the request, or a "Set-Cookie" header
from the response, and uses the corresponding value to match. A
typical use is to get multiple clients sharing a same profile
use the same server. This can be similar to what "appsession"
does with the "request-learn" statement, but with support for
multi-peer synchronization and state keeping across restarts.
See also : "appsession"
set-cookie(<name>)
This fetch function is deprecated and has been superseded by the
"cookie" fetch which is capable of handling both requests and
responses. This keyword will disappear soon.
This extracts the last occurrence of the cookie name <name> on a
"Set-Cookie" header line from the response and uses the
corresponding value to match. This can be comparable to what
"appsession" does with default options, but with support for
multi-peer synchronization and state keeping across restarts.
See also : "appsession"
The currently available list of transformations include :
lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
ipmask(<mask>) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
8. Logging
----------
One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
headers.
In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
- global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
- per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
- per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
- per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
at the termination.
The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
delay.
8.1. Log levels
---------------
TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with information such as the date, time,
source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
HTTP request, HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, conditions
in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values. For example
track a particular user's problems. All messages may be sent to up to two
syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more information
about log facilities.
8.2. Log formats
----------------
HAProxy supports 5 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
and will be detailed in the following sections. A few of them may vary
slightly with the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain
options. The supported formats are as follows :
- the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
extents.
- the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
- the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
- the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
- the custom log format, allows you to make your own log line.
Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
identifier.
Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
8.2.1. Default log format
-------------------------
This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
Example :
listen www
mode http
log global
server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
>>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
(www/HTTP)
Field Format Extract from the example above
1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
2 'Connect from' Connect from
3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
4 'to' to
5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
Detailed fields description :
- "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
- "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
- "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
- "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
- "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
and processed the connection.
- "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
In case of a UNIX socket, the source and destination addresses are marked as
"unix:" and the ports reflect the internal ID of the socket which accepted the
connection (the same ID as reported in the stats).
It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
will eventually disappear.
8.2.2. TCP log format
---------------------
The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Example :
frontend fnt
mode tcp
option tcplog
log global
default_backend bck
backend bck
server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
>>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
Field Format Extract from the example above
1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
4 frontend_name fnt
5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
7 bytes_read* 212
8 termination_state --
9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
Detailed fields description :
- "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
connection to haproxy. If the connection was accepted on a UNIX socket
instead, the IP address would be replaced with the word "unix". Note that
when the connection is accepted on a socket configured with "accept-proxy"
and the PROXY protocol is correctly used, then the logs will reflect the
forwarded connection's information.
- "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
If the connection was accepted on a UNIX socket instead, the port would be
replaced with the ID of the accepting socket, which is also reported in the
stats interface.
- "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
(which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
- "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
and processed the connection.
- "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
applications.
- "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
- "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
See "Timers" below for more details.
- "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
"Timers" below for more details.
- "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
"option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
details.
- "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
- "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
for more details.
- "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
the session was logged. It is useful to detect when some per-process system
limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
- "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
caused by a denial of service attack.
- "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
denial of service attack.
- "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
be processed than on other servers.
- "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
should not be attributed to the logged server.
- "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
- "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
occurs.
8.2.3. HTTP log format
----------------------
The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
is specified in the frontend.
Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Example :
frontend http-in
mode http
option httplog
log global
default_backend bck
backend static
server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
>>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
{} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Field Format Extract from the example above
1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
4 frontend_name http-in
5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
7 status_code 200
8 bytes_read* 2750
9 captured_request_cookie -
10 captured_response_cookie -
11 termination_state ----
12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Detailed fields description :
- "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
connection to haproxy. If the connection was accepted on a UNIX socket
instead, the IP address would be replaced with the word "unix". Note that
when the connection is accepted on a socket configured with "accept-proxy"
and the PROXY protocol is correctly used, then the logs will reflect the
forwarded connection's information.
- "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
If the connection was accepted on a UNIX socket instead, the port would be
replaced with the ID of the accepting socket, which is also reported in the
stats interface.
- "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
- "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
and processed the connection.
- "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
- "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
- "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
- "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
See "Timers" below for more details.
- "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
below for more details.
- "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
"GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
for more details.
- "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
"option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
details.
- "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
- "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
overflowing.
- "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
- "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
- "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
- "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
the session was logged. It is useful to detect when some per-process system
limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
system.
- "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
caused by a denial of service attack.
- "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
denial of service attack.
- "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
processed than on other servers.
- "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
should not be attributed to the logged server.
- "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
- "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
occurs.
- "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
cookies" below for more details.
- "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
and cookies" below for more details.
- "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
8.2.4. Custom log format
------------------------
The directive log-format allows you to customize the logs in http mode and tcp
mode. It takes a string as argument.
HAproxy understands some log format variables. % precedes log format variables.
Variables can take arguments using braces ('{}'), and multiple arguments are
separated by commas within the braces. Flags may be added or removed by
prefixing them with a '+' or '-' sign.
Special variable "%o" may be used to propagate its flags to all other
variables on the same format string. This is particularly handy with quoted
string formats ("Q").
If a variable is named between square brackets ('[' .. ']') then it is used
as a pattern extraction rule (see section 7.8). This it useful to add some
less common information such as the client's SSL certificate's DN, or to log
the key that would be used to store an entry into a stick table.
Note: spaces must be escaped. A space character is considered as a separator.
HAproxy will automatically merge consecutive separators.
Flags are :
* Q: quote a string
* X: hexadecimal representation (IPs, Ports, %Ts, %rt, %pid)
Example:
log-format %T\ %t\ Some\ Text
log-format %{+Q}o\ %t\ %s\ %{-Q}r
At the moment, the default HTTP format is defined this way :
log-format %ci:%cp\ [%t]\ %ft\ %b/%s\ %Tq/%Tw/%Tc/%Tr/%Tt\ %ST\ %B\ %CC\ \
%CS\ %tsc\ %ac/%fc/%bc/%sc/%rc\ %sq/%bq\ %hr\ %hs\ %{+Q}r
the default CLF format is defined this way :
log-format %{+Q}o\ %{-Q}ci\ -\ -\ [%T]\ %r\ %ST\ %B\ \"\"\ \"\"\ %cp\ \
%ms\ %ft\ %b\ %s\ \%Tq\ %Tw\ %Tc\ %Tr\ %Tt\ %tsc\ %ac\ %fc\ \
%bc\ %sc\ %rc\ %sq\ %bq\ %CC\ %CS\ \%hrl\ %hsl
and the default TCP format is defined this way :
log-format %ci:%cp\ [%t]\ %ft\ %b/%s\ %Tw/%Tc/%Tt\ %B\ %ts\ \
%ac/%fc/%bc/%sc/%rc\ %sq/%bq
Please refer to the table below for currently defined variables :
+---+------+-----------------------------------------------+-------------+
| R | var | field name (8.2.2 and 8.2.3 for description) | type |
+---+------+-----------------------------------------------+-------------+
| | %o | special variable, apply flags on all next var | |
+---+------+-----------------------------------------------+-------------+
| | %B | bytes_read (from server to client) | numeric |
| H | %CC | captured_request_cookie | string |
| H | %CS | captured_response_cookie | string |
| | %H | hostname | string |
| | %ID | unique-id | string |
| H | %ST | status_code | numeric |
| | %T | gmt_date_time | date |
| | %Tc | Tc | numeric |
| | %Tl | local_date_time | date |
| H | %Tq | Tq | numeric |
| H | %Tr | Tr | numeric |
| | %Ts | timestamp | numeric |
| | %Tt | Tt | numeric |
| | %Tw | Tw | numeric |
| | %U | bytes_uploaded (from client to server) | numeric |
| | %ac | actconn | numeric |
| | %b | backend_name | string |
| | %bc | beconn (backend concurrent connections) | numeric |
| | %bi | backend_source_ip (connecting address) | IP |
| | %bp | backend_source_port (connecting address) | numeric |
| | %bq | backend_queue | numeric |
| | %ci | client_ip (accepted address) | IP |
| | %cp | client_port (accepted address) | numeric |
| | %f | frontend_name | string |
| | %fc | feconn (frontend concurrent connections) | numeric |
| | %fi | frontend_ip (accepting address) | IP |
| | %fp | frontend_port (accepting address) | numeric |
| | %ft | frontend_name_transport ('~' suffix for SSL) | string |
| H | %hr | captured_request_headers default style | string |
| H | %hrl | captured_request_headers CLF style | string list |
| H | %hs | captured_response_headers default style | string |
| H | %hsl | captured_response_headers CLF style | string list |
| | %ms | accept date milliseconds | numeric |
| | %pid | PID | numeric |
| H | %r | http_request | string |
| | %rc | retries | numeric |
| H | %rt | http_request_counter | numeric |
| | %s | server_name | string |
| | %sc | srv_conn (server concurrent connections) | numeric |
| | %si | server_IP (target address) | IP |
| | %sp | server_port (target address) | numeric |
| | %sq | srv_queue | numeric |
| S | %sslc| ssl_ciphers (ex: AES-SHA) | string |
| S | %sslv| ssl_version (ex: TLSv1) | string |
| | %t | date_time (with millisecond resolution) | date |
| | %ts | termination_state | string |
| H | %tsc | termination_state with cookie status | string |
+---+------+-----------------------------------------------+-------------+
R = Restrictions : H = mode http only ; S = SSL only
8.2.5. Error log format
-----------------------
When an incoming connection fails due to an SSL handshake or an invalid PROXY
protocol header, haproxy will log the event using a shorter, fixed line format.
By default, logs are emitted at the LOG_INFO level, unless the option
"log-separate-errors" is set in the backend, in which case the LOG_ERR level
will be used. Connections on which no data are exchanged (eg: probes) are not
logged if the "dontlognull" option is set.
The format looks like this :
>>> Dec 3 18:27:14 localhost \
haproxy[6103]: 127.0.0.1:56059 [03/Dec/2012:17:35:10.380] frt/f1: \
Connection error during SSL handshake
Field Format Extract from the example above
1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[6103]:
2 client_ip ':' client_port 127.0.0.1:56059
3 '[' accept_date ']' [03/Dec/2012:17:35:10.380]
4 frontend_name "/" bind_name ":" frt/f1:
5 message Connection error during SSL handshake
These fields just provide minimal information to help debugging connection
failures.
8.3. Advanced logging options
-----------------------------
Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
for more information about their usage.
8.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
------------------------------------------
It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
- if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
port scans, which may or may not be desired.
- if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
such as other load-balancers.
- if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
8.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
----------------------------------------------------------
The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
8.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
------------------------------------
Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
8.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
--------------------------------------------------
Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
alternative.
8.4. Timing events
------------------
Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
- Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
the client closes prematurely or times out.
- Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
- Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
connection never established.
- Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
stroke before the server managed to process the request.
- Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
negative.
These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
session has been aborted on timeout.
Most common cases :
- If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
connections have been accepted at once. Setting "option http-server-close"
may display larger request times since "Tq" also measures the time spent
waiting for additional requests.
- If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
of ms on remote networks.
- If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
between the proxy and the server.
- If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
to the server until another one is released.
Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
-1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
flags.
Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
Check the session termination flags, then check the
"timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
the client connection was maintained open.
Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
8.5. Session state at disconnection
-----------------------------------
TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
2-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
each of which has a special meaning :
- On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
session to terminate :
C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
server explicitly refused it.
P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
error in server response which might have caused information leak
(eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
D : the session was killed by haproxy because the server was detected
as down and was configured to kill all connections when going down.
U : the session was killed by haproxy on this backup server because an
active server was detected as up and was configured to kill all
backup connections when going up.
K : the session was actively killed by an admin operating on haproxy.
c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
send or receive data.
s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
send or receive data.
- : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
with nothing left in the buffers.
- on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
R : the proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
(HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
server (HTTP only).
D : the session was in the DATA phase.
L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
- : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
- the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
the client (only in HTTP mode) :
N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, persistence conditionally
ignored, or an attack.
D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
another server.
V : the client provided a VALID cookie, and was sent to the associated
server.
E : the client provided a valid cookie, but with a last date which was
older than what is allowed by the "maxidle" cookie parameter, so
the cookie is consider EXPIRED and is ignored. The request will be
redispatched just as if there was no cookie.
O : the client provided a valid cookie, but with a first date which was
older than what is allowed by the "maxlife" cookie parameter, so
the cookie is consider too OLD and is ignored. The request will be
redispatched just as if there was no cookie.
U : a cookie was present but was not used to select the server because
some other server selection mechanism was used instead (typically a
"use-server" rule).
- : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
- the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
U : the proxy UPDATED the last date in the cookie that was presented by
the client. This can only happen in insert mode with "maxidle". It
happens everytime there is activity at a different date than the
date indicated in the cookie. If any other change happens, such as
a redispatch, then the cookie will be marked as inserted instead.
P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
- : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
The combination of the two first flags gives a lot of information about what
was happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
starvation, attacks, etc...
The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
easier finding and understanding.
Flags Reason
-- Normal termination.
CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
by the client.
cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
"timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
the server takes too long to respond.
CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
long a time to respond.
CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
and the client.
cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
resources for just a few attackers.
SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
503 or 504 here.
SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
"timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
between haproxy and the server.
sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
solution is to fix the application.
sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
external attacks.
PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
PD The proxy blocked an incorrectly formatted chunked encoded message in
a request or a response, after the server has emitted its headers. In
most cases, this will indicate an invalid message from the server to
the client.
PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
containing unauthorized characters. It is also possible but quite
rare, that the proxy blocked a chunked-encoding request from the
client due to an invalid syntax, before the server responded. In this
case, an HTTP 400 error is sent to the client and reported in the
logs.
PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
returned an HTTP 403 error.
PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
reported by the "Tw" timer field.
RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
only be solved by proper system tuning.
The combination of the two last flags gives a lot of information about how
persistence was handled by the client, the server and by haproxy. This is very
important to troubleshoot disconnections, when users complain they have to
re-authenticate. The commonly encountered flags are :
-- Persistence cookie is not enabled.
NN No cookie was provided by the client, none was inserted in the
response. For instance, this can be in insert mode with "postonly"
set on a GET request.
II A cookie designating an invalid server was provided by the client,
a valid one was inserted in the response. This typically happens when
a "server" entry is removed from the configuration, since its cookie
value can be presented by a client when no other server knows it.
NI No cookie was provided by the client, one was inserted in the
response. This typically happens for first requests from every user
in "insert" mode, which makes it an easy way to count real users.
VN A cookie was provided by the client, none was inserted in the
response. This happens for most responses for which the client has
already got a cookie.
VU A cookie was provided by the client, with a last visit date which is
not completely up-to-date, so an updated cookie was provided in
response. This can also happen if there was no date at all, or if
there was a date but the "maxidle" parameter was not set, so that the
cookie can be switched to unlimited time.
EI A cookie was provided by the client, with a last visit date which is
too old for the "maxidle" parameter, so the cookie was ignored and a
new cookie was inserted in the response.
OI A cookie was provided by the client, with a first visit date which is
too old for the "maxlife" parameter, so the cookie was ignored and a
new cookie was inserted in the response.
DI The server designated by the cookie was down, a new server was
selected and a new cookie was emitted in the response.
VI The server designated by the cookie was not marked dead but could not
be reached. A redispatch happened and selected another one, which was
then advertised in the response.
8.6. Non-printable characters
-----------------------------
In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
'}' when logging headers.
Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
containing spaces is "User-Agent".
Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
8.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
---------------------------
Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
Examples :
# capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
# capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
8.8. Capturing HTTP headers
---------------------------
Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
section 4.2 for more details.
It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
in the logs.
Example :
# This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
listen proxy-out
mode http
option httplog
option logasap
log global
server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
# log the name of the virtual server
capture request header Host len 20
# log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
capture request header Content-Length len 10
# log the beginning of the referrer
capture request header Referer len 20
# server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
capture response header Server len 20
# logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
capture response header Content-Length len 10
# log the expected cache behaviour on the response
capture response header Cache-Control len 8
# the Via header will report the next proxy's name
capture response header Via len 20
# log the URL location during a redirection
capture response header Location len 20
>>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
{fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
"GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
>>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
{w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
"GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
>>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
{www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
{Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
"GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
8.9. Examples of logs
---------------------
These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
>>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
"HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
=> long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
>>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
=> Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
>>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
"GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
=> request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
>>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
"GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
=> the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
"rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensitive information which
risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
to return the 502 and not the server.
>>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
=> the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
Nothing was sent to any server.
>>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
=> The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
send a 408 return code to the client.
>>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
=> This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
5 seconds ("c----").
>>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
=> The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
(config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
connection because of too many already established.
9. Statistics and monitoring
----------------------------
It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
Unix socket.
9.1. CSV format
---------------
The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
0. pxname: proxy name
1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
for server)
2. qcur: current queued requests
3. qmax: max queued requests
4. scur: current sessions
5. smax: max sessions
6. slim: sessions limit
7. stot: total sessions
8. bin: bytes in
9. bout: bytes out
10. dreq: denied requests
11. dresp: denied responses
12. ereq: request errors
13. econ: connection errors
14. eresp: response errors (among which srv_abrt)
15. wretr: retries (warning)
16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
17. status: status (UP/DOWN/NOLB/MAINT/MAINT(via)...)
18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
21. chkfail: number of failed checks
22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
25. qlimit: queue limit
26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
27. iid: unique proxy id
28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
29. throttle: warm up status
30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
UNK -> unknown
INI -> initializing
SOCKERR -> socket error
L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example
"Connection refused" (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
disable-on-404
L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
45. hanafail: failed health checks details
46. req_rate: HTTP requests per second over last elapsed second
47. req_rate_max: max number of HTTP requests per second observed
48. req_tot: total number of HTTP requests received
49. cli_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the client
50. srv_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the server (inc. in eresp)
51. comp_in: number of HTTP response bytes fed to the compressor
52. comp_out: number of HTTP response bytes emitted by the compressor
53. comp_byp: number of bytes that bypassed the HTTP compressor (CPU/BW limit)
54. comp_rsp: number of HTTP responses that were compressed
9.2. Unix Socket commands
-------------------------
The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
to be issued one at a time.
It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
own stats.
clear counters
Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
clear counters all
Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
clear table <table> [ data.<type> <operator> <value> ] | [ key <key> ]
Remove entries from the stick-table <table>.
This is typically used to unblock some users complaining they have been
abusively denied access to a service, but this can also be used to clear some
stickiness entries matching a server that is going to be replaced (see "show
table" below for details). Note that sometimes, removal of an entry will be
refused because it is currently tracked by a session. Retrying a few seconds
later after the session ends is usual enough.
In the case where no options arguments are given all entries will be removed.
When the "data." form is used entries matching a filter applied using the
stored data (see "stick-table" in section 4.2) are removed. A stored data
type must be specified in <type>, and this data type must be stored in the
table otherwise an error is reported. The data is compared according to
<operator> with the 64-bit integer <value>. Operators are the same as with
the ACLs :
- eq : match entries whose data is equal to this value
- ne : match entries whose data is not equal to this value
- le : match entries whose data is less than or equal to this value
- ge : match entries whose data is greater than or equal to this value
- lt : match entries whose data is less than this value
- gt : match entries whose data is greater than this value
When the key form is used the entry <key> is removed. The key must be of the
same type as the table, which currently is limited to IPv4, IPv6, integer and
string.
Example :
$ echo "show table http_proxy" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
>>> # table: http_proxy, type: ip, size:204800, used:2
>>> 0x80e6a4c: key=127.0.0.1 use=0 exp=3594729 gpc0=0 conn_rate(30000)=1 \
bytes_out_rate(60000)=187
>>> 0x80e6a80: key=127.0.0.2 use=0 exp=3594740 gpc0=1 conn_rate(30000)=10 \
bytes_out_rate(60000)=191
$ echo "clear table http_proxy key 127.0.0.1" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
$ echo "show table http_proxy" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
>>> # table: http_proxy, type: ip, size:204800, used:1
>>> 0x80e6a80: key=127.0.0.2 use=0 exp=3594740 gpc0=1 conn_rate(30000)=10 \
bytes_out_rate(60000)=191
$ echo "clear table http_proxy data.gpc0 eq 1" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
$ echo "show table http_proxy" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
>>> # table: http_proxy, type: ip, size:204800, used:1
disable frontend <frontend>
Mark the frontend as temporarily stopped. This corresponds to the mode which
is used during a soft restart : the frontend releases the port but can be
enabled again if needed. This should be used with care as some non-Linux OSes
are unable to enable it back. This is intended to be used in environments
where stopping a proxy is not even imaginable but a misconfigured proxy must
be fixed. That way it's possible to release the port and bind it into another
process to restore operations. The frontend will appear with status "STOP"
on the stats page.
The frontend may be specified either by its name or by its numeric ID,
prefixed with a sharp ('#').
This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
level "admin".
disable server <backend>/<server>
Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
during the maintenance.
In the statistics page, a server DOWN for maintenance will appear with a
"MAINT" status, its tracking servers with the "MAINT(via)" one.
Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
their numeric ID, prefixed with a sharp ('#').
This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
level "admin".
enable frontend <frontend>
Resume a frontend which was temporarily stopped. It is possible that some of
the listening ports won't be able to bind anymore (eg: if another process
took them since the 'disable frontend' operation). If this happens, an error
is displayed. Some operating systems might not be able to resume a frontend
which was disabled.
The frontend may be specified either by its name or by its numeric ID,
prefixed with a sharp ('#').
This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
level "admin".
enable server <backend>/<server>
If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
server UP and checks are re-enabled.
Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
their numeric ID, prefixed with a sharp ('#').
This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
level "admin".
get weight <backend>/<server>
Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
sharp ('#').
help
Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
is also displayed for unknown commands.
prompt
Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
command.
quit
Close the connection when in interactive mode.
set maxconn frontend <frontend> <value>
Dynamically change the specified frontend's maxconn setting. Any positive
value is allowed including zero, but setting values larger than the global
maxconn does not make much sense. If the limit is increased and connections
were pending, they will immediately be accepted. If it is lowered to a value
below the current number of connections, new connections acceptation will be
delayed until the threshold is reached. The frontend might be specified by
either its name or its numeric ID prefixed with a sharp ('#').
set maxconn global <maxconn>
Dynamically change the global maxconn setting within the range defined by the
initial global maxconn setting. If it is increased and connections were
pending, they will immediately be accepted. If it is lowered to a value below
the current number of connections, new connections acceptation will be
delayed until the threshold is reached. A value of zero restores the initial
setting.
set rate-limit connections global <value>
Change the process-wide connection rate limit, which is set by the global
'maxconnrate' setting. A value of zero disables the limitation. This limit
applies to all frontends and the change has an immediate effect. The value
is passed in number of connections per second.
set rate-limit http-compression global <value>
Change the maximum input compression rate, which is set by the global
'maxcomprate' setting. A value of zero disables the limitation. The value is
passed in number of kilobytes per second. The value is available in the "show
info" on the line "CompressBpsRateLim" in bytes.
set table <table> key <key> data.<data_type> <value>
Create or update a stick-table entry in the table. If the key is not present,
an entry is inserted. See stick-table in section 4.2 to find all possible
values for <data_type>. The most likely use consists in dynamically entering
entries for source IP addresses, with a flag in gpc0 to dynamically block an
IP address or affect its quality of service.
set timeout cli <delay>
Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
configured weight. Absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256.
Relative weights must be positive with the resulting absolute weight is
capped at 256. Servers which are part of a farm running a static
load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations because the weight
cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only accepted values
are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take effect
immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to
disable a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to
enable it again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command
is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for level
"admin". Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their
name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a sharp ('#').
show errors [<iid>]
Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
"admin".
The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
are reported too.
All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
code.
Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
line.
Example :
$ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
>>> [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
00038 Location: blah\r\n
00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
00204+ minal\r\n
00211 \r\n
In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
HTTP character for a header name.
show info
Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
show sess
Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
show sess <id>
Display a lot of internal information about the specified session identifier.
This identifier is the first field at the beginning of the lines in the dumps
of "show sess" (it corresponds to the session pointer). Those information are
useless to most users but may be used by haproxy developers to troubleshoot a
complex bug. The output format is intentionally not documented so that it can
freely evolve depending on demands. The special id "all" dumps the states of
all sessions, which can be avoided as much as possible as it is highly CPU
intensive and can take a lot of time.
show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
possible to dump only selected items :
- <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
- <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
for example:
1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
- <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
Example :
$ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
>>> Name: HAProxy
Version: 1.4-dev2-49
Release_date: 2009/09/23
Nbproc: 1
Process_num: 1
(...)
# pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
(...)
www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
$
Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
show table
Dump general information on all known stick-tables. Their name is returned
(the name of the proxy which holds them), their type (currently zero, always
IP), their size in maximum possible number of entries, and the number of
entries currently in use.
Example :
$ echo "show table" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
>>> # table: front_pub, type: ip, size:204800, used:171454
>>> # table: back_rdp, type: ip, size:204800, used:0
show table <name> [ data.<type> <operator> <value> ] | [ key <key> ]
Dump contents of stick-table <name>. In this mode, a first line of generic
information about the table is reported as with "show table", then all
entries are dumped. Since this can be quite heavy, it is possible to specify
a filter in order to specify what entries to display.
When the "data." form is used the filter applies to the stored data (see
"stick-table" in section 4.2). A stored data type must be specified
in <type>, and this data type must be stored in the table otherwise an
error is reported. The data is compared according to <operator> with the
64-bit integer <value>. Operators are the same as with the ACLs :
- eq : match entries whose data is equal to this value
- ne : match entries whose data is not equal to this value
- le : match entries whose data is less than or equal to this value
- ge : match entries whose data is greater than or equal to this value
- lt : match entries whose data is less than this value
- gt : match entries whose data is greater than this value
When the key form is used the entry <key> is shown. The key must be of the
same type as the table, which currently is limited to IPv4, IPv6, integer,
and string.
Example :
$ echo "show table http_proxy" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
>>> # table: http_proxy, type: ip, size:204800, used:2
>>> 0x80e6a4c: key=127.0.0.1 use=0 exp=3594729 gpc0=0 conn_rate(30000)=1 \
bytes_out_rate(60000)=187
>>> 0x80e6a80: key=127.0.0.2 use=0 exp=3594740 gpc0=1 conn_rate(30000)=10 \
bytes_out_rate(60000)=191
$ echo "show table http_proxy data.gpc0 gt 0" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
>>> # table: http_proxy, type: ip, size:204800, used:2
>>> 0x80e6a80: key=127.0.0.2 use=0 exp=3594740 gpc0=1 conn_rate(30000)=10 \
bytes_out_rate(60000)=191
$ echo "show table http_proxy data.conn_rate gt 5" | \
socat stdio /tmp/sock1
>>> # table: http_proxy, type: ip, size:204800, used:2
>>> 0x80e6a80: key=127.0.0.2 use=0 exp=3594740 gpc0=1 conn_rate(30000)=10 \
bytes_out_rate(60000)=191
$ echo "show table http_proxy key 127.0.0.2" | \
socat stdio /tmp/sock1
>>> # table: http_proxy, type: ip, size:204800, used:2
>>> 0x80e6a80: key=127.0.0.2 use=0 exp=3594740 gpc0=1 conn_rate(30000)=10 \
bytes_out_rate(60000)=191
When the data criterion applies to a dynamic value dependent on time such as
a bytes rate, the value is dynamically computed during the evaluation of the
entry in order to decide whether it has to be dumped or not. This means that
such a filter could match for some time then not match anymore because as
time goes, the average event rate drops.
It is possible to use this to extract lists of IP addresses abusing the
service, in order to monitor them or even blacklist them in a firewall.
Example :
$ echo "show table http_proxy data.gpc0 gt 0" \
| socat stdio /tmp/sock1 \
| fgrep 'key=' | cut -d' ' -f2 | cut -d= -f2 > abusers-ip.txt
( or | awk '/key/{ print a[split($2,a,"=")]; }' )
shutdown frontend <frontend>
Completely delete the specified frontend. All the ports it was bound to will
be released. It will not be possible to enable the frontend anymore after
this operation. This is intended to be used in environments where stopping a
proxy is not even imaginable but a misconfigured proxy must be fixed. That
way it's possible to release the port and bind it into another process to
restore operations. The frontend will not appear at all on the stats page
once it is terminated.
The frontend may be specified either by its name or by its numeric ID,
prefixed with a sharp ('#').
This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
level "admin".
shutdown session <id>
Immediately terminate the session matching the specified session identifier.
This identifier is the first field at the beginning of the lines in the dumps
of "show sess" (it corresponds to the session pointer). This can be used to
terminate a long-running session without waiting for a timeout or when an
endless transfer is ongoing. Such terminated sessions are reported with a 'K'
flag in the logs.
shutdown sessions <backend>/<server>
Immediately terminate all the sessions attached to the specified server. This
can be used to terminate long-running sessions after a server is put into
maintenance mode, for instance. Such terminated sessions are reported with a
'K' flag in the logs.
/*
* Local variables:
* fill-column: 79
* End:
*/
Reference in New Issue View Git Blame Copy Permalink